JP6541423B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a typical gaming machine of this type, it is configured to perform variable display, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, for example, when the display result is a specific display result (big hit symbol). Are known. In this type of gaming machine, a variable display that is not yet started in the variable display is stored as hold storage, and the hold storage is displayed as the hold display.

  Among such conventional gaming machines, there is one that executes an effect of changing the display mode of one hold display in a plurality of steps (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-212304, A (paragraph number 0418 etc.)

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, with respect to effects that change in multiple stages, there is a lack of interest in the game, such as the lack of relevance between the mode of the hold display and the execution timing of the effect that suggests a change in the mode of the hold display. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game for the effect indicating the change of the mode of the hold display.

(A) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and controlling the gaming machine in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, wherein information regarding the variable display which has not been started is stored as a holding storage, and the holding storage means Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the stored hold, fluctuation corresponding display means capable of performing fluctuation corresponding display corresponding to the variable display during execution of the variable display, and specific identification information Re-variation display executing means for executing re-variation display after stopping, and pending display mode change for changing the display mode of the pending display before the target variable storage indication is executed, and the variation display being executed Display mode changing means capable of changing at least one of the display mode changes with the change-over display mode change for changing the display mode of the change-over mode display, and the hold display mode At least one of the first change indication effect indicating the change and the second change indication effect indicating the change corresponding display mode change, the hold indication period corresponding to the target storage and the change display And a change suggestion effect executing means capable of being executed at any one of a plurality of timings during the period, wherein the change suggestion effect executing means is a display mode of the change object by the display mode changing means. However, depending on which of the first specific display and the second specific display is different from the normal display, the selection ratio of the timing to execute the change suggestion effect differs, and the second change suggestion effect is common Success effect of changing the display mode of the variation correspondence display after executing the suggestion effect, and change of the display mode of the variation response display after performing the common suggestion effect Among the multiple timings during the variable display, there is a failure effect not to be caused, and the ratio at which the success effect is performed differs depending on at which timing the common suggestion effect is performed, and the specific identification information When the common suggestion effect is performed at the timing after the stop, the ratio of performing the successful effect is higher than when the common suggestion effect is performed at the timing before the specific identification information stops.
(1) Hold display means for displaying a variable display and controlling information on the variable display which has not been started yet, which is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player The first special view reserve storage unit 151A, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B, the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and the hold storage stored by the hold storage unit Hold display means (image display device 5, RAM 102, first start winning storage display area 5HL, second start winning storage display area 5HR, etc.) capable of displaying as a hold display (hold display etc.), and during variable display 25. Variation corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120, S in FIG. 25) capable of performing variation corresponding display (active display etc.) corresponding to the corresponding variable display. 32) and the re-variation display executing means for executing re-variation display after the specific identification information is stopped, and the suspension display mode change for changing the mode of the suspension display before the variation display of the target retention memory is executed At least one of the display mode change (the change during the hold shift in FIG. 43) and the change-responsive display mode change (the change during active display in FIG. 44) for changing the mode of the change-responsive display during execution of the variable display. The display mode changing means (the CPU 120 for effect control, S532 in FIG. 25, the icon effect setting process in FIG. 45, etc.) capable of causing the first change effect (FIG. 26 (B), (C) And, as shown in FIG. 42, the second change effect (FIG. 26 (B), (D) indicates the change of the display mode during the shift operation). And a change display effect of at least one of an active display change effect in which an arrow acts on the active display, as shown in FIG. 42), the hold display period corresponding to the target hold storage and the change display period And a change effect execution unit (effect control CPU 120, S532 in FIG. 25, etc.) that can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings during the period, and the change effect execution unit The display mode of the change object by the change means is either the first specific display (character icon display of FIG. 41 (A)) different from the normal display or the second specific display (character icon display of FIG. 41 (B)) Depending on the existence, the selection ratio of the timing to execute the change presentation is different (as shown in (B) and (C) of FIG. Since the change effect execution rate is high during the indication shift and the change effect execution rate is high during the active display, the character icon display and the character icon display cause the change display during the hold display shift and the change effect during the active display. The rate of selecting which change effect to execute is different. )
According to such a configuration, the player is made to the display mode of the change target and the timing of the display mode change for the first change effect that suggests the hold display mode change and the second change effect that suggests the change-responsive display mode change. The interest of the game can be improved with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
A common effect (for example, in the first system change effect, a group of figures performed in common when changing the mode of the fluctuation-responsive display and not changing the mode of the fluctuation-responsive display during the execution of the fluctuation display The effect before Y1 collides with the active display, the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display, etc. in the second system change effect, and the variation response after the common effect is executed The effect of changing the mode of display (for example, in the first system change effect, the effect that the graphic of any shape “star” of graphic group Y1 collides with the active display and changes to the display mode of the star, or In the systematic change effect, an effect in which the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame to change the thickness of the line of the active display frame, or both of these first system change effect and the second system change effect Any effect that is executed to change the display mode such as an active display or an active display frame) or a failure effect that does not change the mode of the variation-responsive display (eg, in the first system change effect, any of the figure group Y1 in the active display The figure “star” disappears before the collision and the display mode of the active display does not change, or in the second system change presentation, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame , Performs effects that do not change the thickness of the lines of the active display frame, or both of these first system change effects and second system change effects, and does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display or the active display frame Further comprising effect execution means capable of
The ratio at which the success effect is performed differs depending on at which timing the common effect is performed among a plurality of timings during the variable display.

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the execution timing of the common effect. Also, by giving attention to the execution timing, the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The display of the hold display can be changed to the display of the first specific display and the second specific display after being displayed on one side (for example, the display mode of the hold display is a character icon Description of modification etc. which change from display to character icon display).

  According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the change of the display mode of the specific display or the change of the type of the specific display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The change presentation execution means is a plurality of types of change presentation (the first change presentation and the second change presentation during the on-hold shift) in which the ratio of causing the display mode change is different for each of the first change presentation and the second change presentation. Change presentation (active change display, first change presentation and second change presentation about change presentation, etc.) Change presentation (shown in FIG. 42, first change presentation with effect shown by blue arrow during pending shift) The second change effect selected from the second change effect that produces an action effect with red arrows and the second change effect that produces an effect effect with blue arrows during active display, and the second effect effect with red arrows The change presentation is performed by the presentation mode etc. of the change presentation selected from the change presentation.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change mode of the suspension display mode change or the change mode display mode change, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
For each of the first specific display and the second specific display, when the timing with the lower selection ratio is selected among the first timing and the second timing included in the plurality of timings, the selection ratio is high. The rate at which the player's degree of expectation changes to a display mode of a predetermined level or higher is higher than when the user's timing is selected (for example, as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C for character icon display) While the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is lower than that during pending display during active display, as shown in FIG. 26 (F) to (I), pending display is during pending display. In comparison, "superheat" display with a high level of jackpot expectation degree is selected as a character icon display after display mode change is high, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay more attention to the mode of change of the hold display from the display type of the display mode change target and the change timing to be selected.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by one mode of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example etc. of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize judgment processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a change category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a change category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of at the time of winning a prize production decision processing in production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows a presentation pattern table at the time of holding selection. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect at the time of active display change presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the presentation execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system change presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio by an active display change production execution presence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the 1st system | strain detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the display mode change effect and the presence or absence of the display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. It is a figure which shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. It is a figure which shows a change production pattern table. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of an effect display when a character icon is displayed as a pending | holding display in an image display apparatus. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of an effect display of the active display after displaying a character icon as a pending | holding display in an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows icon production setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect which chooses execution timing of a display mode change production under suspension display from a plurality of timings.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launch device and struck.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 2, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in the vertical position and an enlarged open state in the tilting position by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric vehicle shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off. It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It becomes an expansion and release state which is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The winning by the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. In addition, the winning by the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are detected based on the fact that the game balls having passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning) Is paid out as a prize ball, and the first special symbol display device 4A executes the first special symbol display device if the first special image reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 5 is satisfied. In addition, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second start opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second start winning), a predetermined number (for example, three) of The second special symbol display device 4B executes the second special symbol display device 4B if the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special view storage number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special view game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative symbol executed in the image display device 5 is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the second starting winning may be the same or different.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning, the first start When the first start condition for allowing the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of the winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is under execution) In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the execution waiting state). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  Information on the variable display corresponding to the first start winning combination for which the first starting condition for the first starting winning combination is satisfied but the first starting condition for permitting the start of the variable display game due to the first starting winning combination is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (first special-image hold information) until a first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the suspended first special-pattern suspension information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first-special-pattern suspension information is executed.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even when the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start When the second start condition for allowing the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is under execution) In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the execution waiting state). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  Information on the variable display corresponding to the second start winning combination that does not satisfy the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the second start winning combination although the second starting condition by the second starting winning combination is satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special-image hold information) until a second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special-image hold information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the second special-character hold information to be digested is executed.

  When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "starting winning opening". Further, when the first start winning combination and the second start winning combination are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "starting winning combination". Further, the number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the number of first special figure holding storage, the number of second special drawing holding storage, and the total number of holding storage are not distinguished from each other, it is usually simply referred to as "special drawing holding number of storage". When it is referred to as “the number of storages”, it may refer to any one or two of the number of first special view pending storages, the number of second special view pending storages, and the total number of pending storages. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and as a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form the winning opening of.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is off, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter) I can not do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter ) To make it easier. In this manner, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). Do. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball which has passed (enter) the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a winning ball. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is in the open state in the special variable winning winning ball device 7, the gaming ball is in the other winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the gaming ball can enter into the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the big winning hole, A second condition that is disadvantageous to the

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or a dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays special symbols (also referred to as "special figures") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each (referred to as variable display or variable display) Do. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special view", and the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is " It is also called "second special view". Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and a variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (A variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special view game. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game".

  The first special symbol display device 4A (same as the second special symbol display device 4B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, symbol numbers "0" to "9" are attached to the numerals indicating "0" to "9", and symbols "10" are attached to the symbol indicating "-". Good. In addition, a special symbol is not limited to what is comprised from the number which shows "0"-"9", the symbol which shows "-", etc. FIG. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in 7-segment LEDs are set in advance are set as special symbols. You may display it.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) . The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of hold for the first special view game) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories so as to be identifiable by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the first special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new first start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in an identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the second special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new second start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

  On the left side of the game area in the game board 2, a pass gate 41, a normal symbol display 20, and a common drawing hold display 25C are provided. The gaming ball having passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 is used if the common drawing reserve storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). A common drawing start condition for executing a common drawing game (described later) to be executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc., similarly to the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is plural types of identification information different from the special symbol. A variable display game in which a normal symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a common drawing game (or "normal drawing game"). Information on a regular drawing game in which a normal drawing start condition is satisfied but a normal drawing start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as holding data (general drawing holding information).

  The common drawing hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the standard drawing start condition for executing the standard drawing game is satisfied by the detection of the gaming ball by the gate switch 21, the common drawing start condition that allows the start of the common drawing game is not satisfied ( For example, when the spread game established earlier is in execution), the execution of the spread game is suspended (the spread game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display). Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative design) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special figure game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a special figure game using the first special figure) or a second special figure executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special drawing game using the second special drawing), variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative designs is executed in the display area (decorative display area).

  As shown in FIG. 1 as an example, decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of any one of the first special view game or the second special view game, ie, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any of the first special view or the second special view Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a decorative symbol (finalized decorative symbol, final The stop symbol (also referred to as a stop symbol) is displayed in a stop state. That is, in the display area (the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction (correspondence) with the first special view game (or the second special view game) The finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as a final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative design may be, for example, eight kinds of design (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or any other figure. Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, each symbol number of "1" to "8" may be attached to each alphanumeric character indicating "1" to "8". The decorative design is not limited to eight types, but may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  Stop display of the finalized special symbol, which is the result of variable display of special symbol (also referred to as display result of special figure), and stop the variable display, or finalized design that is the result of variable display of decorative symbol (final stop symbol) Stop display to stop the variable display and the fixed display which is the variable display result of ordinary symbols (also referred to as a common drawing display result) stop display to stop the variable display and complete display It is also referred to as a stop indication, a final stop indication, or a derivation indication (or simply "derivation"). In addition, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the decorative symbol may not necessarily coincide with the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the special symbol, and within the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special pattern fluctuation time), the decorative symbol It is good if the fluctuation time is settled.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the determined special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (stop of the determined ornament symbol) It may be later than the display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the finalized decorative symbol is stopped, and the finalized special symbol may be stopped when the predetermined effect is finished. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

  Moreover, you may perform stop display different from complete stop display (final stop display, derivation | leading-out display). For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed has become "0" is displayed while being displayed while causing, for example, slight shaking or expansion or contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) It includes things that are stopped and displayed without causing time, slight shaking, expansion and contraction, and the like.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start winning storage display area 5HL and a second start winning storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning combination storage display area 5HL, as in the first suspension display 25A, a first suspension display is performed to display the first special map suspension storage number in an identifiable manner. That is, the number of first special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, as in the second storage display 25B, a second storage display is performed to display the second special map storage number in a specifiable manner. That is, the number of second special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased due to the establishment of the new first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first starting winning storage display A new first hold display is added on the right side of area 5HL (center side of the display area of image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the first special view hold information for the increased amount, and the first start prize storage display area 5HL If there is another first pending display in the above, the new first pending on the left side of the other first pending display (more than the other left first pending display if there are multiple other first pending displays) You may add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first suspension displays in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, when the number of suspension of the first special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduction The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other first pending displays is shifted (shifted) to the erased first pending display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning combination storage display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the second special view game increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second suspension display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second starting winning storage display A new second hold display is added on the left side of area 5HR (center side of the display area of image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special view hold information, and second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second pending display in the above, the new second pending on the right side of the other second pending display (more than the other right second pending display if there are multiple other second pending displays) You may add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, when the number of holdings of the second special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second of the decrease amount The second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold display is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). When the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start winning storage display area 5H".

  In addition to the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second starting winning storage display area 5HR, the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second displaying area in the display area of the image display device 5 may be used as a reserve display area. Hold display deleted (moved) from start winning a prize storage display area 5HR (that is, first special view reserve information digested by establishment of first start condition, and second digested by establishment of second start condition) A special image representing information including active display (also referred to as variation response display, display at the time of digestion, display this time, etc.) according to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol executed based on the special view hold information Active display area AHA (variation corresponding display area, digestion display area, digestion display area, present pending display area, present pending display area, active pending display area, active For example, a first display area, a second display area, a second display area, a second display area, a second display area, a second display area, a second display area, a second display area, and a second display area. It is arranged.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is disposed between the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second starting winning storage display area 5HR. The display area AHA may be disposed at any position of the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, an active display or an active display such as characters or images displayed around the active display or around the active display frame. The information etc. according to is displayed by the special image.

  In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball entered into any of the general winning openings is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. . At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided in which the game ball that has not entered any winning port is incorporated.

  At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as winning balls and gaming balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launcher (storage) An upper plate (ball hitting supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be dischargeable to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. A trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push and pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod may be provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 31A or the like. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 31B, for example, to detect the operation performed by the player on the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 8UL and 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speakers 8LL and 8LR are installed at the lower left and right lower portions of the upper plate (the lower left and right oblique upper portions). It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as the speaker 8. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a rendering sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song or the like which is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, a message) or the like which is output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning on the first start winning opening etc). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output in response to the operation performed on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the presentation sound is, for example, a sound to notify of requesting an operation action to the push button 31B, a voice, a sound to notify transition to the reach state at the time of transition of the reach state (described later), a voice or These are sounds, voices, etc. for giving notice or suggesting that the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state before shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is opened, etc. .

  A light emitting member (light emitter) that emits light as effect or decoration is provided on the inside and the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting members are installed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. A light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless otherwise specified. The lamp 9 may be configured of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be configured of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotary lamp (for example, a lamp lamp) having a rotary unit. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 etc.) in the game area.

  Although the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9 and the like are effect devices that execute effects, the game machine 1 may include another effect device such as a effect model having a drive unit as the effect device.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each structure is an example, Comprising: You may arrange | position in another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol indicator 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Also, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the common view hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common drawing", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 6B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the establishment of the first start condition after the establishment of the first start condition, the special figure game (first special view game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. A special drawing game (second special drawing game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the establishment of the second starting condition after the starting condition is established. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7” are used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol showing the number “2” is used as a small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol, small hit symbol and lost symbol in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a symbol, or a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7, predetermined upper limit time The big winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is performed in which the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is put into the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The special winning opening door with the big winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then the special winning opening is closed, thereby the special variable winning winning ball device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round may be ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win a prize winning opening etc.).

  Among the rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 7 the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open It is also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time when the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers of "3", "5" and "7" that will be the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers of "3" and "7" are normally open round big hit symbols, and the numbers of "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (usually open big hit state) as a normal opening round specific gaming state controlled after a normal opening round big hit symbol is derived as a finalized special symbol in a special figure game, a special winning prize ball device of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 The big winning opening is opened in a period until the door reaches a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period, or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. Thus, a round is performed to change the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. The normally open jackpot state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the jackpot gaming state (short-term opening jackpot state) as a short-term opening round specific gaming state controlled after the short-term opening round big hit symbol is derived as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period when the large winning opening is opened by the large winning opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state For one second). In the short-term open big hit state, the open period of the big winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and the other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of round executions may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big-hit state.

  In such a short-term open jackpot state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball is won in the large winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 second, etc.) and is very short. Therefore, the short-term open jackpot state is a jackpot gaming state in which the balls (prize balls) can not be obtained substantially. The short-term open jackpot state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  Also, the big hit gaming state as the short opening round specified gaming state is not limited to the one having a short opening time of the big winning opening compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specified playing state, for example, opening the big winning opening While the period (upper limit time) is the same for the short opening round specified gaming state and the normal opening round specified playing state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) that makes the big winning opening open in the short opening round specified playing state is The number may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific gaming state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short opening round specified gaming state, the period for changing the big winning opening in each round to the first state where the gaming ball is easy to pass (enter) is from the first period in the normal opening round specified gaming state Also, the second period may be at least one of the short second period and the second round number in which the number of round executions is smaller than the first round number in the special release round specific gaming state. .

  Thus, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot gaming state, the advantages advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a probability change state (high probability state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  After the special symbol indicating the small hit symbol "2" is derived as the determined special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, a variable winning operation is performed to change the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, an operation of setting the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R arranged in the display area of the image display 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B In response to the start of any special drawing game among the games, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is variable during a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be in the predetermined reach state which constitutes a part of the combination of a display.

  With the reach state, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, about the decorative symbol (also referred to as "reach variation symbol") not being stopped and displayed yet Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated in synchronization while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching.

  Further, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be A rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 etc. The operation mode may be different from the operation mode.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after reach production may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”). As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different depending on which one of the plurality of reach effects is performed, that is, depending on which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach having a high jackpot expectation degree higher than the normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) + (except for big hit time The probability that the effect will be executed is calculated by (probability of not being a big hit)} (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always a “big hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one aspect of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a slip effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like that is realized by a variable display operation such as the decorative symbol. In the slip effect, after changing the decorative symbol in all in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative symbol display areas (for example, "left" decorative symbol display area 5L) are displayed among the decorative symbol display areas displayed temporarily. By changing the decorative pattern again in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R) and displaying it in the stop state, effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the slip effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of decorative symbols after variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the finalized decorative symbols as variable display results are derived and displayed. There are times when the variable display state of the decorative symbol changes to the reach state by executing the display again, and when the decorative symbol that constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-series effect, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being met once, the fixed display that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started The decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in total (for example, a predetermined pseudo random chance eye etc. is a decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, or any part or the whole) until the symbol is derived and displayed Once temporary stop display is made for all displayed, re-variable display, which is effect display for starting variable display of all decorative designs again in decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, For example, up to 4 times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display frequency) in the pseudo-series effect is variable display until all the decorative patterns in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are temporarily stopped (initial variable The number of times of display) (one time), the number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after all the decoration patterns have been temporarily stopped last (1 time), and re-change between the first variable display and the last variable display The number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) is grasped as the number of times (X + 1) smaller by one time than the number of times (X + 2) of adding up. Further, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number (temporary stop number) at which all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The first variable display to the first temporary stop display is also called the first pseudo link, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display is also called the second pseudo link, the third Variable display (the second re-variable display) to the third temporary stop display is also referred to as the third pseudo-run, and the fourth variable display (the third re-variable display) to the fourth temporary stop display the fourth It is also called pseudo ream. Further, the number of pseudo runs in the pseudo run effect is also referred to as a pseudo run fluctuation number (or a pseudo run number). That is, the number of times of pseudo continuous change, the number of times of re-variable display, and the number of times of temporary stop are the same. The increase in the number of times of the pseudo run with the first, second, third, ... is also referred to as "the pseudo run continues".

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", re-variable display (re-variation) is performed 1 to 4 times, and based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, the decorative symbol is variable It can appear as if the display started two to five times in a row.

  In addition, as for simulated series production, before reaching reach in the particular fluctuation (before reaching reach state), the simulated series chance eye mark temporary stop indication in any part or all of decorative design display area 5L, 5C and 5R As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be temporarily stopped temporarily, and after reach is established, the display is made pseudo in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the continuous chance eyes are displayed temporarily. In other words, the effect mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous effect includes at least the effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before reaching the reach state, and the effect mode in which the chance symbol is displayed temporarily stop after the reach state. May be

  The slip effect (also similar to the pseudo effect) may be given to the player for notifying or suggesting that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the big hit expectation is high. . Hereinafter, a presentation for giving notice or suggesting to a player that there is a possibility that any reach presentation or a certain reach presentation may be executed, a high hit probability, and the like may be collectively referred to as a notice presentation. The advance notice may include a variable display operation different from the slip effect and the pseudo effect, in addition to the slip effect and the pseudo effect, for example, display of a background image, display of a message window, Some may use a rendering operation different from the variable display effect such as a hold display, audio output, light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing), and the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the advance notice effect, it is common when changing the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the change and when not changing the display mode of the special image. Includes common renditions to be performed. Further, the advance notice includes a success effect in which the display mode of the special image is changed after the common effect is performed, and a failure effect in which the display mode of the special image is not changed after the common effect is performed. Note that the preliminary presentation effect may include a suggested production that suggests a common effect. In addition, as with the common effect, the suggested effect may be an effect that is commonly performed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. In other words, a case that refers to an effect that suggests that a common effect is to be performed is referred to as a suggested effect, and an effect that indicates that either a successful effect or a failure effect is performed (a common effect or a common effect In some cases, another effect is referred to as a suggested effect.

  It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually check) whether the contents of the advance notice or the suggestion suggested by the advance notice effect are realized (actually confirmed). For example, the notice effect that indicates to the player that there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol by the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reaching state is at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol by the winning of the game ball It may be executed (started) before reaching the reach state (or non reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display result by the winning of a certain game ball will be a "big hit" is that at least the finalized decoration symbol by the winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed. Also, it may be executed (started) before.

  Among the preliminary announcement effects, those which become the pre-reading advance announcement effects (also referred to as “pre-determined preliminary announcement effects”) may be included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading advance notice effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the first pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as the first pending display of the target, and the pending information of the target is supported. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as the second hold display for the target, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information on the target is also referred to as the variable display for the target. In addition, the preread advance notice effect is executed during the digestion of the pending information of the target (when executed during the digesting process of the pending information of the target including variable display of the target) and before the pending information of the target There are a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information, and a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information of the target and during the digest of the hold information before the hold information of the target.

  After the winning of the game ball (after the establishment of the start condition), the player performs whether or not the content for giving notice of the advance notice effect of the prefetch notice is realized. It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, the rendering operation serving as a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state due to the winning of a certain gaming ball is at least the decorative symbol by the winning of the gaming ball The variable display state may be executed (started) before reaching the reach state (or non-reach state). In addition, at least for the rendering operation of the gaming ball, there is a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a "big hit" by the winning of a certain game ball. It may be executed (started) before the finalized decorative symbol by the winning combination is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, for the advance notice notice effect (pre-judgment notice effect), for example, the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the first start winning memory display area 5HL An action presentation such as a hold change presentation without changing the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. In addition, for the advance notice notice effect (predetermination notice effect), for example, a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, or in the second start prize memory display area 5HR An action presentation such as a hold change presentation without changing the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a determined special symbol in the special drawing game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state In some cases, the finalized decoration pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as a "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol state of the decorative symbol is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Depending on the situation, after the reach effect is performed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

  Among the special symbols that are normally open round big hit symbols as special symbols determined in special drawing games, when the normal big hit symbols such as the special symbols showing the number “3” are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is In response to the reaching state, after a predetermined reach effect is performed, etc., a determined decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "non-probable variation big hit combination") among a plurality of types of big hit combinations The symbol is displayed stopped. The predetermined normal big hit combination, for example, the same kind of normal symbol (also referred to as "non-probable symbol") on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line in the horizontal direction) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Is a combination to display the final stop. An example of a normal symbol is an even-numbered symbol number "2", "4", "6", "8" among four kinds of decorative symbols "1" to "8". It is.

  In response to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming a big hit symbol usually, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc., the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed is A variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "non-probability change" (also referred to as a "usually big hit") when the variable display result is a "big hit" is referred to. Based on the variable display result becoming "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-deterministic change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after that, time shortening control (time saving control) is performed.

  By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from the specific gaming state such as the big hit gaming state etc. The initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where a system reset is performed, initialization processing after power on Control) is performed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is met first between the special figure game being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result becoming a "big hit". When it is done, you should finish.

  Among the special symbols that are normally open round big hit symbols as special symbols determined in the special drawing game, when the probability variation big hit symbols such as the special symbols indicating the number “7” are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "normal" is performed, etc., a predetermined probability variation big hit combination among a plurality of types of big hit combinations The finalized decorative design may be stopped and displayed. In other words, in the special figure game, when the probability variation big hit symbol is displayed in the final stop, the decoration symbol in the predetermined probability variation big hit combination is finally stopped, and the decoration symbol in the predetermined regular big hit combination is stopped display There are cases where The predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is, for example, a combination in which the same kind of probability variation symbols are aligned on the effective line and the final stop is displayed. An example of the odd variation design is an ornament pattern having an odd number “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” among eight kinds of symbol designs “1” to “8”. It is.

  Regardless of whether the finalized decoration design is usually a big hit combination or a positive variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the positive variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the variable display result is "big hit" It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “probability change” in a case. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "probable change", it is controlled to a normally open big hit state, and after that, time variation control and probability change control (probable change control) are performed. By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result (special view display result) becomes a "big hit" in the special view game of each time is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability change control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state is controlled again is satisfied. As in the case of the time saving control, the probability change control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the probability change control may be ended when the decision of “with probability change fall” to end the probability change control is made in the probability change fall lottery which is executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state .

  When time saving control is performed, control to shorten the variation time (normal figure variation time) of the regular symbol in the regular figure game by the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state, or the variation of the regular symbol in each regular figure game Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per common view" than in the normal state, and tilt control of movable wing in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "per common view" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to perform longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts more than in the normal state. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, and a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. The gaming state in which time-saving control or high opening control is performed along with the probability variation control is also referred to as high-probability high-base state. A probability change state in which only the probability change control is performed and time reduction control or high open control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which time saving control and high open control are performed together with probability variation control may be referred to as a "probability state", and in order to be distinguished from high probability low base status, it may also be referred to as a time reduction probability variation state. On the other hand, in order to distinguish from the high probability high base state, the positive variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and short time control or high open control is not performed may be referred to as time short non definite variable state. The short time state in which time saving control or high open control is performed without performing the probability change control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state where neither the probability change control nor the time saving control nor the high open control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time saving control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be executed frequently, and each special figure game (first special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game and the second special figure game is "big hit" is enhanced, which is advantageous for the player. A game state advantageous to a player different from the big hit game state is also referred to as a special game state.

  When the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a finalized special symbol in a special drawing game, and the small hitting symbol such as a special symbol indicating a number “2” is stopped and displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of combinations of a plurality of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the short-term opening round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, a predetermined reach effect is executed corresponding to the change display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After, for example, the finalized decoration pattern which is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various finalized decorative symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming the short-term opening round big hit symbol is when the variable display result is "big hit" It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of a "probable" (also referred to as a "probable big hit" or "a sudden big change big hit"). Based on the variable display result becoming "big hit" in the "big hit" of "probable", it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state, and after that end, it is sufficient to perform probability change control together with time saving control.

  The small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed as a final symbol in the special drawing game, and the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the "small hit". After the end, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled before the variable display result is "small hit". However, when the special view game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, if the number of times the special view game has been executed in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit gaming state ends, The special gaming state may end and be in the normal state.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol that the finalized decorative symbol becomes the non-probable variation big hit combination or the positive variation big hit combination, the re-lottery effect may be executed. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is usually a big hit combination, it is changed again with the same decorative symbol aligned, One of the decorative symbol (probable pattern) and the decorative symbol (normal symbol) that is usually a big hit combination may be displayed as a final decorative symbol.

  Usually, after the determined decoration symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, during the execution of the round at the start of the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state, the next round starts after any round is finished in the big hit gaming state The period until it is played, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc., there is a definite change notification effect of whether to control in a definite change state or not An effect may be performed. Note that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion promotion may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the like. The jackpot promotion promotion that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state may be referred to in particular as "ending promotion promotion".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 2 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) and the like that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20, etc. It also has a function to control.

  For example, from the microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, to the main substrate 11 from the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 and the like that transmit the solenoid drive signal of the above to the solenoids 81 and 82 are mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display 5, the speaker 8 and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for presentation such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electric component for effect such as all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 or all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8 or all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9 etc. It has a function of determining the control content for executing a predetermined rendering operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and is for outputting sound from the speaker 8 based on a command from the effect control board 12, control data, etc. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 12, the lamp 9 etc. is turned on / off driven. The lamp driver circuit etc. which are done are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. If it is In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the game machine 1 is similarly connected to the main board 11 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2), a switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, and a switch for detecting illegal electromagnetic wave. In addition, the main substrate 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a common view hold indicator 25C. The wiring which transmits the command signal for performing display control of etc. is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol or the like variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern or the like to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 3B, for example, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit” or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the final stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal open big hit state or short open open big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special winning is generated. This is a first starting opening winning combination designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the first special drawing game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  Command B 200 H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6 B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22 B, and the second starting winning is generated. It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the 2nd special figure game by special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserve storage number notification command for notifying the first special view retention storage number in order to display the first special view retention storage number in an identifiable manner in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in an identifiable manner in the second start winning storage display area 5HR or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening winning combination designation command or the second starting opening winning combination designation command which specifies whether the first starting winning opening has been started or the second starting winning opening has been started as holding storage information. While transmitting, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command for specifying the first special map storage number and the second special image storage number are transmitted. In addition, when the number of pending storages increases, the pending storage number addition specification command (the first pending storage number addition specification command or the second indicates that the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number has increased). While the pending storage number addition designation command is transmitted, the pending storage number subtraction designation command (No. 1) indicates that the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number has decreased when the pending storage number decreases. (1) A pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Also, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating the determination result of the big hit type, as a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” as the winning determination result. is there. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of winning random number value determination processing (see FIG. 15A), the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result when the start winning is generated. And if it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is determined to be a "big hit", determine the type of the big hit based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and change the category The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether the variable display result is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the value set in the symbol designation command, or the big hit type. As well as being recognizable, it is possible to recognize a fluctuation category based on the value set in the fluctuation category command.

  The effect control commands such as the fluctuation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc.). Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, the light emitting operation of the lamp 9 The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, the blinking operation, and the lighting operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. Among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, an audio control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various fluctuations stored temporarily in the RAM 102 Fluctuation data read operation to read data, reception operation that CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105, CPU 103 to play game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105 The transmission operation etc. which output various signals outside are also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation category, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for display result determination and the random number value MR5 for variation pattern determination is controlled so as to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of the MR 5 may be counted.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol will be described. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss” is referred to as “loss fluctuation pattern”. In the lost fluctuation pattern, “non-reach fluctuation pattern (“ non-reach lost fluctuation pattern ”“ non-reach fluctuation pattern ”corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ non-reach ”in the case where the variable display result is“ loss ” (Also referred to as “variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern (“reach possibility variation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” Also included).

  Also, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a "big hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a "small hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". A plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared as the big hit variation patterns.

  For the non-reach fluctuation pattern, prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times, corresponding to the time reduction control to be executed when the total number of pending storages is large or when the gaming state is a definite change state or a time reduction state It is good. Thus, control of shortening the fluctuation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state can be performed by selecting any variation pattern according to the total pending storage number and the gaming state.

  For fluctuation patterns including reach effects such as a big hit fluctuation pattern and a reach fluctuation pattern, fluctuation patterns corresponding to reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of variation categories and variation patterns in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the fluctuation category “PA1” is a shortening / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" and "PA3-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3". The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" and "PB3-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3". The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the slip effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the slip effect is performed. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to the other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a super reach α (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The same applies to the other fluctuation patterns in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (rendering) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the variation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed twice.

  In addition, in FIG. 5, although the description regarding the fluctuation pattern in case the big hit classification in the small hit fluctuation pattern and the big hit fluctuation pattern is exact is abbreviate | omitted, the lost fluctuation pattern (non reach fluctuation pattern, It is the same as the reach loss fluctuation pattern) and the big hit fluctuation pattern (except when the big hit type is sudden).

  The ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes data (for example, information for specifying the content of control commands) constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 11, The data etc. which comprise a table as shown to 5 are memorize | stored.

  FIG. 6 shows an example of the configuration of the special view display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special view display result determination table, the first special view display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and the second special view display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. It is prepared. In the first special view display result determination table 130A, a finalized special symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed in the first special view game (the special view game using the first special view) by the first special symbol display device 4A. Previously, whether to control the variable display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", whether to control the variable display result to the small hit gaming state as "small hit", for special display display result determination Is a table referred to in order to determine based on the random value MR1. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a finalized special symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B Previously, whether to control the variable display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", whether to control the variable display result to the small hit gaming state as "small hit", for special display display result determination Is a table referred to in order to determine based on the random value MR1.

  In the first special view display result determination table 130A, the special view is displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) or the positive variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In the second special view display result determination table 130B, disturbance for special view display result determination depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state (low probability state) or a definite change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "loss".

  In each of the first special view display result determination table 130A and the second special view display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) More determined values than at times are assigned to the "big hit" special map display results. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is a "big hit" as compared with the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) The probability of being determined to control the state is high.

  In the setting example of the first special view display result determination table 130A, the determination value of the predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special view display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special view display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special view display result of "small hit". With such a setting, the second special figure game does not become a "small hit", so a normally variable winning ball device 6B is formed, for example, a short time state (low probability high base state) or positive change state (high probability high base state). In the game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of "small hit" which is difficult to obtain the winning ball, and to prevent the decline of the game interest due to the extension of the game .

  In the second special view display result determination table 130B and the first special view display result determination table 130A, determination values of different predetermined ranges may be allocated to the special view display result of "small hit". For example, in the second special view display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value may be assigned to the “small hit” special view display result as compared to the first special view display result determination table 130A. This makes it possible to avoid frequent occurrences of "small hits" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, in the first special view game and the second special view game, determination of the special view display result may be performed with reference to the common special view display result determination table.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit". Is a table to be referenced. In the big hit classification determination table 131, the first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed or the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type according to whether (the special figure game using the second special figure) is executed is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “probability Are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "."

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be varied (also referred to as the variation special figure) is the first special figure, the predetermined value "82"-"99" value) is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable", but when the second special figure game is executed, if the variation special figure is the second special figure, The decision value is not assigned to the "probable" jackpot type. With such a setting, the second special figure game does not become "probable", so that it is possible to obtain a winning ball in the gaming state in which the gaming ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a difficult "probability" and to prevent the decline of the game interest due to the extension of the game.

  In addition, the determination value of a different predetermined range may be allocated to the jackpot type of “probable” in the case where the variation special drawing is the first special drawing and the variation special drawing is the second special drawing. For example, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the "probable" jackpot type than when the variation special figure is the first special figure. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of "probability" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data in the case where the variation feature is the first feature or the second feature.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table which is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that are different from each other in the type of variation category that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the determination ratio of each category, and the like. In the variation category determination table, each of the variation categories is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determination of the variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the determination values (for example, the range and the number of the determination values, etc.) assigned to at least one variation category among the plurality of variation categories are mutually different There is. Note that one large change category determination table including information of all the change category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of change category determination tables.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of the plurality of variation patterns. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables which are different from each other in the types of fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the fluctuation pattern determination table, the determination rates of the respective variation patterns, and the like. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables in which the above-described decision values (for example, the range and the number of decision values, etc.) assigned to at least one fluctuation pattern among a plurality of fluctuation patterns are mutually different There is. Note that, instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 including information of each variation pattern determination table.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data required to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like occurs (eg Process flag etc. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 is a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common view reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game (although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A and the first start winning occurs but has not yet started The reserve data (first special view reserve information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the CPU 103 random number based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 etc. is stored as reserved data (first special view reserved information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game that is not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning occurs. The hold data (second special view hold information) of (the second special view game played by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reserved data (second special view reserved information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  In addition, the hold data of the first special view game by the first special symbol display device 4A (the first special view hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special view game of the second special symbol display device 4B The common holding storage unit may store the holding data (second special view holding information based on the establishment of the second start winning) in association with the holding number.

  The common drawing reserve storage unit 151C is reserved data regarding a common drawing game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the gaming ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 Store information). For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 The numerical value data etc. which show the random number value MR4 for 4 are stored as reservation data (general drawing reservation information) until the number of memory reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, and the second special view hold storage number The second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number, etc. It is memorized.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting the

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, etc., and the effect control CPU 120 independently perform random number data updating indicating numerical value indicating random number values. A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 to execute processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 Fluctuation data readout operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the reception operation, reception operation to receive input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, the presentation control CPU 120 to the presentation control CPU 120 A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the sound control substrate 13 are transmitted to the effect control substrate 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, or the game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts up numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations and settings.

  For example, the hold display mode determination table to be referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL to any one of a plurality of types is stored in the ROM 121 There is. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of suspension display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of display mode that can be determined in the suspension display mode determination table, the determination ratio of each mode, and the like. In the pending display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the first pending display is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first pending display. . Note that one large hold display mode determination table including information on all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121 instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables.

  In addition, for example, the ROM 121 stores a pending display mode determination table which is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second pending display displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. It is done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of suspension display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of display mode that can be determined in the suspension display mode determination table, the determination ratio of each mode, and the like. In the pending display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the second pending display is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode for the second pending display. . Note that one large hold display mode determination table including information on all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121 instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores a holding effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether or not the holding effect (also referred to as an effect effect or a hold change effect) is performed. Specifically, in the holding effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for the execution presence / absence determination of holding effect is shown for each of non-execution and execution of holding effect. It is assigned. In the present embodiment, the pending presentation is a previewing notice effect for changing the display mode of the pending display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL to a notice mode, and the second starting winning storage display area 5HR. The pre-reading notice effect is to change the display mode of the pending display being displayed to the notice mode. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether or not the active display change effect (success effect) for changing the special image including the active display is performed. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination of active display change presentation without and with active display change presentation respectively. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

  In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) in which the special image is changed to the notice mode. In other words, an active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, information according to the active display (for example, active display or characters around an active display or a periphery of the active display frame, etc.) It is an effect to be changed (main notice effect). For the active display change effect, as described above, the common effect and the success effect (also referred to as the active display change effect) executed when changing the special image after the common effect is performed and the common effect are performed It includes a failure effect (also referred to as an active display change cassette effect) to be executed later when the special image is not changed. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect does not act on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 by not affecting the display mode of the special image, or acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 It is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, in the active display change effect, the first system change effect for changing the aspect of the special image to one of a plurality of aspects, which is the change of the first system, and the change of the aspect of the special image to the second system And a second system change effect to be changed to any of a plurality of modes. In the first system change effect, there is a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and in the second system change effect, according to the second system change effect There is a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is in the special image The effect is to change the display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image).

  In addition, the first system change is referred to in the ROM 121 to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect which is one of the active display change effects (a timing such as at which timing of the change to execute). An execution timing determination table of effects is stored. In this first system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect relating to the first system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first system change presentation effect execution timing determination tables in which the type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change presentation, the determination ratio of each, etc. are mutually different. It may be A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change rendition is assigned to each execution timing of the execution timing determination table of the first system change rendition. There is. Also, in place of the plurality of first system change performance execution timing determination tables, one large first system change performance execution timing determination table including information of all the first system change performance execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121 You may memorize.

  In addition, the second system change is referred to in the ROM 121 to determine the execution timing (the timing such as which timing of the change is to be executed) of the second system change effect which is one of the active display change effects. An execution timing determination table of effects is stored. In this second system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect relating to the second system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of second system change presentation effect execution timing determination tables in which the type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change presentation, the determination ratio of each, etc. are mutually different. It may be A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second systematic change presentation is assigned to each execution timing of the second systematic change presentation execution timing determination table. There is. Also, in place of the plurality of second system change presentation execution timing determination tables, one large second system change presentation execution timing determination table including the information of all the second system change presentation execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. You may memorize.

  Note that the ROM 121 has a plurality of first system changes that are different from each other in the type of execution timing and the determination ratio etc. that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change presentation and the execution timing determination table of the second system change presentation. A presentation execution timing determination table for presentation and an execution timing determination table for the second system change presentation may be stored as one large active display change presentation execution timing determination table. In the execution timing determination table of this active display change presentation, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change presentation at each execution timing, the second system A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, or a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned. Also, in place of the plurality of active display change presentation execution timing determination tables, one large active display change presentation execution timing determination table including information of all the active display change presentation execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121 It is also good.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table which is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table for active display change effects stored in the ROM 121, random number values (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the active display change effects for each of the effect patterns for the active display change effects A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

  Note that the hold change presentation execution timing determination table may be stored in the ROM 121, which is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change presentation (the timing of how many subsequent changes are to be performed, etc.). Further, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of pending change presentation execution timing determination tables in which the type of execution timing that can be determined in the pending change presentation execution timing determination table and the determination ratio of each are different. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change presentation may be allocated to each of the execution timings in the pending change presentation execution timing determination table. Further, instead of the plurality of hold change presentation execution timing determination tables, one large hold change presentation execution timing determination table may be stored in the ROM 121 including information of all the hold change presentation execution timing determination tables.

  Note that the ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the other main notice effects of the above-mentioned active display change effect. It may be In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main preview effect pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the type of the main preview effect pattern that can be determined in the main preview effect pattern determination table and the determination ratio of each. What is necessary is just to assign a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main preview rendering pattern to each of the main preview rendering pattern in the main preview rendering pattern determination table. Note that, instead of the plurality of main notice presentation effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice presentation pattern determination table including information of all the main notice presentation pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 may store a pending change presentation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the presentation pattern (presentation mode) of the pending change presentation to any of a plurality of types. In this case, if a value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for holding change effect pattern determination is assigned to each of the hold change effect pattern determination tables in the hold change effect pattern determination table in the ROM 121 Good.

  The ROM 121 may store a pending change cassette effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether or not the pending change cassette effect is executed. In this case, the pending change cassette effect execution execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value (not shown) for deciding whether or not the pending change cassette effect is executed, with and without the pending change cassette effect execution. A decision value) may be assigned.

  The ROM 121 may store a pending change cassette effect execution timing determination table which is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the pending change cassette effect (a timing such as how many subsequent changes are to be executed). In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of pending change cassette effect execution timing determination tables in which the type of execution timing that can be determined in the pending change cassette effect execution timing determination table and the determination ratio of each are different. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change gusset presentation may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the pending change cassette presentation execution timing determination table. It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of pending change cassette effect execution timing determination tables, one large pending change cassette effect execution timing determination table may be stored in the ROM 121 including information of all pending change cassette effect execution timing determination tables.

  The ROM 121 may store a pending change cassette effect pattern determination table which is referred to in order to determine the rendering pattern (display mode) of the pending change cassette effect to any one of a plurality of types. In this case, a value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for holding change change presentation effect pattern determination in each of the hold change change presentation effect pattern in the hold change change presentation effect pattern determination table is stored in the ROM 121. It may be assigned.

  Further, in the ROM 121, an active display mode determination table (also referred to as a "detergent display mode determination table") referred to in order to determine the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA to any of a plurality of types. May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store display mode determination tables of a plurality of active displays which are different from each other in type of display mode which can be determined in the display mode determination table of active display, and each determination rate. In the display mode determination table of the active display, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display may be assigned to each of the display modes of the active display. That is, the display mode of the plurality of active displays different from each other in the determination value (for example, the range and the number of the determined values, etc.) allocated to at least one display mode among the display modes of the plurality of types of active displays in the ROM 121 The determination table may be stored. Note that, instead of the plurality of display mode determination tables of active display, one large active display mode determination table including information of display modes determination table of all active displays may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, the ROM 121 is configured with a plurality of effect control patterns used to control the effect operation by the effect control CPU 120 using various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the effect model, etc.) Data etc. are stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as a decorative pattern, a notice effect (including a pre-reading notice effect), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data or the like indicating control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration in a period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special view game until the finalized special symbol as the special view display result is derived and displayed, corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns. Effect operation of variable display operation and reach effect of the symbol, re-lottery effect etc., or various effect operation without variable display of decorative symbol (for example, hold for display mode of hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) It is comprised from the data etc. which show the control content of various production operation | movements, such as a production | presentation and the holding | maintenance production with respect to the display mode of the holding | maintenance display in 2nd start prize memory display area 5HR.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, The contents of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. may be set in series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data or the like for designating the content of the operation control of the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control CPU 120 A determination value corresponding to an execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main substrate 11, or that a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control may be set according to the predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, light extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on an operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, and data indicating control content of a rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data Control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the effective period and determining the contents of the effect is performed. Note that dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a component for effect that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol An effect control pattern may be provided to execute an effect operation in response to a partial period (e.g., a period for executing an advance effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the rendering operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, etc.) An effect control pattern of may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the ROM 121 of the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern It is also possible to temporarily store the storage address in the above in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and designate the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect device (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Advance the control of the movable member etc. provided in the effect model. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and an effect for designating execution of the effect control Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

  An instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. The display control unit 123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 120 causes the predetermined VDP or the like to read out the image data indicated by the instruction from the image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily store it in the VRAM. Further, in the voice control board 13 which receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, a data holding area 190 for effect control as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages are provided. . When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening, start opening winning combination designation command (first start opening winning combination designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command Is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as one set of four commands. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that among the commands, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the top of the free space of the first start winning reception command buffer 194A in the order received at the first start winning. At the time of the first starting winning combination, command transmission is performed in the order of a first starting opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is properly performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the storage area corresponding to each of buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the first special view game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first starting opening prize designation command. Command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the command associated with the first start opening winning combination designation command) However, the shift is performed while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “2” is shifted to buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “3” becomes buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages. . When there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening, start opening winning combination designation command (second starting opening winning designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (second pending storage number notification command Is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as one set of four commands. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured such that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other among these commands.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the top of the free space of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B in the order received at the second start winning. At the second start winning combination, command transmission is performed in the order of a second start opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10C, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the second start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command , Change category command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the second special figure game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second starting opening winning a prize specified command Command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the command associated with the second start opening winning combination designation command) However, the shift is performed while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to buffer number "1".

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first preread notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A are provided in the first read advance notice buffer 194C. That is, in the first read advance notice buffer 194C, the contents of the determination regarding the read advance notice effect related to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10 (B) due to start of variable display of decorative design, etc. In the pre-read advance notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Also, with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is another buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10 (B) When it is shifted to the second buffer number, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number in the first read advance notice buffer 194C.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the second preread notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B are provided in the second preread notice buffer 194D. That is, in the second preread notice buffer 194D, the contents of the determination regarding the preread notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the preread advance notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. In addition, in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is another buffer number due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol etc. In the second pre-read advance notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process to be a gaming control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Hereinafter, step S is simply referred to as S. Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13 ).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing is executed (S16). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B. Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in I / O 105 corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in game control buffer setting unit 155, effect control After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, etc., transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S208 and S211 of FIG. 13 as the start winning process. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S220 of FIG. 14 as random number value determination process at the time of winning.

  In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 13, CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the first start port switch 22A is on based on (S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (S201: Yes), the number of first special view pending storages (the number of first special view game pendings) is a predetermined upper limit (for example, upper limit storage) It is determined whether or not "4") (S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the number of first to-be-stored storages by reading the first to-be-stored storage number count value which is the storage value of the first to-be-stored storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of first special view storages is not the upper limit in S202 (S202; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (S207).

  When the first start port switch 22A is off at S201 (S201; No), or when the number of first special view storages has reached the upper limit at S202 (S202; Yes), the process of S209 is performed. Later, whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B Is determined (S203). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (S203; Yes), the second special view reservation storage number (the number of suspension of the second special view game) is a predetermined upper limit (for example, the upper limit storage number) It is determined whether or not "4") (S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special image storage number by reading the second storage number count value, which is the storage value of the second storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. If it is determined in S204 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit (S204: No), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (S210).

  After the processing of S207 is performed, the start winning processing (FIG. 14) is executed (S208), the stored value of the starting opening buffer is "0 (initialized)" (S209), and the processing proceeds to S203. After the process of S210 is executed, the start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is "0" (initialized) (S212), and the start winning determination process is ended. . As a result, even if the start winning combination of the game balls is simultaneously detected in the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  The CPU 103 updates as the start winning process (S208, S211) so as to add 1 to the number of to-be-saved storages according to the start port buffer value which is the storage value of the start port buffer (S215 in FIG. 14). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the processing of S215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to add 1 (S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the process of S216, the CPU 103 selects a special figure display result determination random number value MR1 from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154 for determining the big hit type. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted (S217). The numerical data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the top of the free entry in the special view holding storage unit 151 according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as holding information (S218). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special image storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, Numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in second special image storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of S218, transmission setting of the starting opening winning combination designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (S219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the transmission command buffer in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer, etc. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning combination designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning combination designated command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. The setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning combination designation command is performed. The start opening prize winning specification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Be done.

  Following the process of S219, a winning combination random value determination process is executed (S220). After that, for example, the storage address of the suspension storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc. to transmit the suspension storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 The setting is performed (S221). For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 is executed to transmit the main storage 11 to the effect control board 12 after the special symbol process process is finished. Be done.

  The CPU 103 checks the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, confirming the state of the time saving flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like as the winning random number value determination process (S220). It identifies (S401 of FIG. 15 (A)). The CPU 103 identifies the definite variation state when the definite variation flag is on, and identifies the short time status when the definite variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off. At times, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

  Subsequent to the process of S401, from the table data constituting the first special view display result determination table 130A or the second special view display result determination table 130B, the starting opening buffer value ("1" or "2") or the current game In accordance with the state, the special chart display result determination table data to be used for determining the special chart display result is selected (S402). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first special view display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special view display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. Thereafter, it is determined whether numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result extracted in S217 of FIG. 14 is within the predetermined big hit determination range (S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special chart display result of "big hit" in the special chart display result determination table data selected by the process of S402 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each random value MR1 and each. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of a determined value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the value one by one. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value and the maximum value of the big hit determination range by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be the "big hit" by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range (big hit start determination) it can.

  When it is determined in S403 that the value is not within the jackpot determination range (S403; No), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (S404). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the “small hit” special view display result in the special view display result determination table data selected in the process of S402. It may be determined whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hitting determination range. When it is determined that the small hit determination range is not within the small hit determination range in S404 (S404; No), a symbol designating command according to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is transmitted to the effect control board 12 Setting is performed (S405).

  When it is determined in S404 that it is within the small hitting determination range (S404; Yes), a symbol designating command according to the case where the variable display result is "small hitting" is transmitted to the effect control board 12 The setting for (S407) is performed.

  If it is determined in S403 that the jackpot is within the judgment range (S403; Yes), the jackpot type is judged based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special view (the “first special view” corresponding to “1” or the “second special view” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start opening buffer value. Then, the table data for determining the big hit type is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. A setting for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result by the process of S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (S410).

  After one of the processes of S405, S407, and S410 is performed, a variation category is determined (S412). That is, the variation category is determined to any one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of S412, the CPU 103 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, etc. Select one of the variation category determination tables to be set as a use table from the above.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 can display the special view display result (for example, the determination result of S403 or S404), and the number of pending storages (for example, the storage value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). And select one of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table based on the first pending storage count value and the like. Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses a variation category determination table set as a use table and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for variation category determination extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Based on the change category, one of the plurality of change categories is determined.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referenced to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on a variation category determination table of the above four types (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure). FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as "C-TBL2" in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table according to another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table according to another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). In order to simplify the description, a variation category determination table in which a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 17A is set may be referred to simply as the variation category determination table of FIG. 17A. The same applies to the other determination tables such as FIGS. 17B to 17D and the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 is a selection example of selecting any setting from among the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIG. 17A to FIG. This is a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among four types of variation category determination tables.

  The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D), numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation category determination are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3 is a fluctuation category 70 (values in the range of "0" to "69") are allocated to the variation category "PA2" and 27 (values in the range of "70" to "96") are variation category Two (values in the range of "97" to "98") are assigned to the fluctuation category "PA4" and one (value "99") is assigned to the fluctuation category "PA5". There is. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a ratio of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category "PA4" at 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category "PA5" at a ratio of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four of the 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3 (“0 The values in the range of “3” to “3” are assigned to the variation category “PA1”, and 85 (values in the range of “4” to “88”) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”. "-" Value of "96" is assigned to the variation category "PA3", two (values in the range of "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4", one (value " 99 ") is assigned to the variation category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 × 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 × 100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category "PA4" at 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category "PA5" at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0” of “100” (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3). '-'63' are assigned to the variation category 'PA1', 25 ('64'-'88' values) are assigned to the variation category 'PA2', and eight ('89' "-" Value of "96" is assigned to the variation category "PA3", two (values in the range of "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4", one (value " 99 ") is assigned to the variation category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “CTBL3” in FIG. 17C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), and the variation category "PA3" is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), variation category "PA4" at 2% (2 ÷ 100), and variation category "PA5" at a rate of 1% (1 の 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, 20 (“0” of “100” (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3. The values in the range of “19” to “19” are assigned to the variation category “PB3”, 40 (values in the range of “20” to “59”) are assigned to the variation category “PB4”, and 40 (“60 "" To "99" are assigned to the fluctuation category "PB5". That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the fluctuation category “PB3” is 20% (20 × 100) and the fluctuation category “PB4” is 40% (40 × 100), The variation category "PB5" is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special view display result is “loss”, shortening / non-reach (when the number of pending storages is large compared to when the number of pending storages is small) Loss) The percentage of change categories (change category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination ratio "64%" of the fluctuation category "PA1" in the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL3" selected when the special map display result is "loss" and the number of reserved memories "4". > Determining ratio "4%" of the fluctuation category "PA1" in the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL2" selected when the special drawing display result is "loss" and the number of pending memories "3" or "2" The determination ratio “0%” of the fluctuation category “PA1” in the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special view display result is “loss” and the number of pending storages “1”.

  Moreover, in the setting example of FIG. 17 (A)-FIG.17 (C), when a special figure display result is "loss", the variation category (super reach (loss)) (whether there is a large or small number of pending storage) The determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA4” or the fluctuation category “PA5”) is fixed. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3", the determination ratio of the variation category "PA5" It is assumed that the percentage of the change category "PA4" is "2%".

  Moreover, in the setting example of FIG. 17 (A)-FIG. 17 (C), it is any of fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL1", fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL2", and fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL3" Even if it exists, the determined value of the random value MR3 is made to correspond to the same (common) change category (the same change category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value, any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is "99", any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" Also, the variation category "PA5" is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined regardless of which of the above-mentioned variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of "89" to "96", the variation category "PA3" is determined regardless of which of the above-mentioned variation category determination tables. Further, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of "64" to "69", the variation category "PA2" is determined regardless of which of the variation category determination tables described above. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (value of each range described above), it becomes reach, super reach, super reach α, and super reach β in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them of the variable display corresponding to the start winning, etc., and to improve the interest in the game. In the setting example of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, The variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined whether the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. This makes it possible to easily determine in advance at least not reach.

  Thereafter, according to the determination result (determination result) in the process of S412, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 (S413) And the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Do.

  The special symbol normal processing of S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result is derived and displayed as to whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be "big hit" or "small hit". To be done. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a process of deciding the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S112 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the stored value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or incremented by 1 Is the first special drawing game (special drawing game using the first special drawing) by the special symbol display device 4A or the second special drawing game (the special drawing using the second special drawing) by the second special symbol display device 4B A common timer measures the elapsed time regardless of whether it is a game. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation processing in S112 may be processing to control the variation of the special symbol in the first special view game or the second special view game by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop process, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol to be the variable display result of the special symbol is stop displayed (derived) The process for setting up is included. Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not, and if the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are both off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the variable display result becoming “big hit” etc., the processing etc which does the setting for starting execution of the round in big hit game state and opening the big winning opening include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened may be set according to whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “probability”. As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probability" or "probability", set the upper limit of the period when the big winning opening is in the open state to "29 seconds", and the number of big wins that will be the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, setting may be performed to set the normally open big hit state. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponds to "probable", and while setting the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is in the open state, to "0.1 seconds", the number of opening times of the winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting “15 times”, setting may be made to be a short-term open jackpot state. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc., the big winning opening And the like are included to determine whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". .

  The big hit opening post process of S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect as a rendering operation is notified by a rendering device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc. The processing includes processing for waiting until, and processing for performing various settings for starting probability change control and time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of setting for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for opening the big winning opening is the same as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "probable". The setting for the small hit gaming state may be performed by setting “0.1 seconds” and setting the opening number of the special winning opening to “15 times”. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "9".

  The small hit open processing of S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time etc. A process of determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, it is sufficient to execute processing such as stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "10".

  The small hitting end processing of S120 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "10". In this small hitting end process, it waits until the waiting time corresponding to the period when the rendering operation to notify the end of the small hitting gaming state is executed by the rendering device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc. Processing etc. are included. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is not changed, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is “0” (S 231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special view game is on hold. For example, in the process of S231, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special view reservations is other than "0" in S231 (S231; No), the special data is stored as the suspension data stored in the second special view suspension storage unit 151B corresponding to the suspension number "1". The random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of S232, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by decrementing the second reserved memory number count value by 1 and updating so as to decrement the second special image reserved memory number by one, The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers “2” to “4”) in 151 B are shifted upward by one entry ( S233). Further, in the process of S233, the gaming control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter is decremented by one. At this time, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (S234).

  When the number of second special view reservations is "0" at S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether the number of first special views storage is "0" (S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special view game is suspended. For example, in the process of S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 may read the first hold memory count value stored in the first hold memory counter and determine whether the read value is “0”. .

  As described above, since the process of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, the first special view game and the second special view game are performed. Is held, the second special view game is executed prior to the first special view game. In addition, it is not limited to the aspect in which the second special view game is executed with priority over the first special view game, and the game ball enters (passes through the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) ) And the special figure game (the first special figure game, the second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start winning game (the first starting prize, the second starting prize) occurs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine which one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the number of first special view reservations is other than "0" in S235 (S235; No), the special data is stored as the suspension data stored in correspondence with the suspension number "1" in the first special view suspension storage unit 151A. The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (S236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of S236, the first special figure holding memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting the first holding memory number count value by 1 and updating, and the first special view holding memory unit The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers “2” to “4”) lower than the pending number “1” in 151A are shifted upward by one entry ( S 237). Further, in the process of S 237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the fluctuation special feature designation buffer value is updated to "1" (S238).

  After performing any of the processes of S234 and S238, FIG. 15 is used as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “losing”. Similar to the process of S402 shown in (A), the special chart display result determination table data is selected (S239). That is, in the process of S402, the first special view display result determination table 130A or the second special view display result determination table 130B is set in the use table according to the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of S239, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. The second special drawing display result determination table 130B may be set in the use table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the respective special image display results of "big hit", "small hit" and "lost" In comparison with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is to be "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" (S240).

  After the special view display result is determined in S240, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (S241). When it is determined that the "big hit" (S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation can be “non-probability”, “probability”, or “probability”. In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S245), the jackpot type determined Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0”, if “probability change”, “1”, and if “probability”, “2” may be set.

  If it is determined that the "big hit" is not made in S241 (S241; No), it is determined whether the special map display result is a "small hit" (S246). When it is determined that the "small hit" (S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S247).

  If it is determined in S246 that the game is not a "small hit" (S246; No) or after executing any of the processes in S245 and S247, advance determination as to whether or not to control to a large hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state The determination special symbol is set according to the determination result and the determination result of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state (S248).

  After setting the finalized special symbol in S248, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting processing (S249), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. If the number of reserved memories of the special view game using the first special view at S235 is "0" (S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demonstration display setting (S250), the special symbol normal processing ends Do. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (waiting customer demonstration specification command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main substrate 11 It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  In the variation pattern setting process of S111, the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination random value MR3 and the variation pattern determination confusion from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data representing the numerical value MR5 is extracted.

  As described above, in the case where the determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category exists in any of the respective variation category determination tables according to the number of pending storages, the determination corresponding to the same variation category When the random number value MR3 that matches the value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of pending storages is significantly different between when the winning random number determination process (S220) is performed and when the variation pattern setting process (S111) is performed. Also, in the variation pattern setting process, the same variation category as the winning combination random number value determination process is determined. For example, in the specific example of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is “99”, for example The variation category "PA5" is determined in both the time random number value determination process and the variation pattern setting process. If random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of, for example, "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined regardless of the number of pending storages in the winning random number determination process or the variation pattern setting process. Be done. In the process of S261, although it is preferable to determine the fluctuation category using the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination stored as pending data, the CPU 103 newly extracts the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination. Alternatively, the variation category may be determined using the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the variation category to determine the variation category as in S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the variation category determination table to be used is selected from among the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. And the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category to determine the variation category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects, from among the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, any one of the fluctuation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table, based on the fluctuation category which is the determination result. Subsequently, based on the fluctuation pattern determination table set as the usage table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for the fluctuation pattern determination described above, the CPU 103 selects one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns. decide.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. The ROM 101 stores eight variation pattern determination tables corresponding to variation categories. FIG. 19A is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table selected when the fluctuation category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach lost)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table which is selected when the fluctuation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table selected when the fluctuation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 19 (D) to 19 (H).

  As described above, on the main board 11, in the start winning determination process of S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning combination designation command according to the start opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 is performed (S219) , S403, S404, S409, etc., the transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special figure display result determined is performed (S405, S407, S410), and according to the fluctuation category determined in S412. The transmission setting for transmitting the variation category command (S413) is performed, and the transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage count notification command is performed (S221).

  After these processes are executed, the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) by executing the command control processing of S17 shown in FIG. When the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the start opening winning combination designation command (the first start opening winning combination designation command or the second start opening winning combination designation command), the symbol specification command, the variation category command, the pending storage number notification command Four commands (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set.

  In addition, in the main substrate 11, in the special symbol normal processing of S110, a finalized special symbol which is a variable display result of a special symbol using a random number value MR1 for determining a special image display result or a random number MR2 for determining a big hit type etc. It is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process of S111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined using the random number value MR3 for variation category determination, the random number value MR5 for variation pattern determination, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern setting process of S111, the variable display result notification command for designating the determined special symbol determined as described above, the variation pattern designating command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, etc. Transmission setting for transmission to the control board 12 is performed. When variable display is started by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, a variable display result notification command, a variation pattern specification command, etc. are included in one timer interrupt. Sent in a batch. In addition, it is not limited to what is collectively transmitted in 1 timer interruption, and one command may be sequentially transmitted by the command control process of S17 for every timer interruption.

  That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) in the special symbol normal processing (S110) is used as a "big hit" or "small hit". And it is decided whether or not to control to the small hitting game state, the decision etc of the concrete variable indicatory feature (the fluctuation pattern) of the decoration pattern is done with the fluctuation pattern setting processing (S111), each production control command The content determined by the above is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Also, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (S220) It is determined whether or not to be controlled to the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state as a "hit", the determination of a rough variable display mode (variation category) of the decorative symbol, etc., determined by each effect control command The content is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.
In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and installs it on the effect control board 12 Performs register settings and the like for the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S72: No), the process of S72 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 occurs separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, control to be a rendering control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 Capture the signal.

  The effect control command taken in at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  When the timer interrupt flag is on at S72 (S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (S73), and command analysis processing is executed (S74). In the command analysis process executed in S74, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read and then read out. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in S74, the effect control process process is executed (S75). In the effect control process of S75, various effect devices such as display operation of effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, sound output operation from the speaker 8, light emission operation in the lamp 9, and drive operation in the effect model With regard to the control content of the rendering operation used, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of S75, effect random number updating process is executed (S76), and indicates effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 as various random number values used for effect control. Update the numerical data by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of S72. The various random number values updated in S76 and used for effect control include various random number values such as MR6 to MR12 in addition to the random number values for determining the final symbol to be described later.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S74 of FIG. 20 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc., whereby the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is It is determined whether there is any (S501). At this time, if there is no reception command (S501; No), the command analysis process is ended.

  If there is a reception command in S501 (S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first starting opening winning combination designation command (S502) . Then, when it is the first starting opening winning combination designating command (S502; Yes), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (S503). For example, in the process of S503, if the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 Good.

  If the received command is not the first starting opening winning combination designation command in S502 (S502; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning combination designation command (S504). Then, when it is the second starting opening winning combination designating command (S504; Yes), the second holding storage number notification waiting time is set (S505). For example, in the process of S505, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage count notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second starting opening winning combination designating command in S504 (S504; No), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command (S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in S506 (S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variation category command (S507). If it is determined in S507 that the received command is not a change category command (S507 returns No), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage count notification command (S508). Then, when it is the first pending storage number notification command (S508; Yes), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (S509).

  If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at S508 (S508; No), it is determined whether the receiving command is the second pending storage number notification command (S510). Then, if it is the second pending storage number notification command (S510; Yes), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (S511).

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in S506 (S506; Yes), or if the received command is a variation category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or any one of S503, S505, S509, and S511 is executed. If the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, the reception command is received in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. After storing at the top of the free space in (S512), the process returns to S501.

  Also, if the received command is a symbol designation command in S506 (S506; Yes), or if the received command is a variation category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or any of the processes in S503, S505, S509, and S511. If the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of S503 for the received command received one before the received command, the received command is subjected to the second start winning received command After storing at the head of the free space in the buffer 194B (S512), the process returns to the process of S501.

  When the first pending storage count notification command is received together with the first change start command, the pending storage count notification command may not be stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only required that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  When the second pending storage count notification command is received together with the second change start command, the pending storage count notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only required that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If it is determined in S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage count notification command (S510 returns No), settings according to other received commands are performed (S513), and the process returns to S501. For example, when the received command is a game state specification command, the game state specification command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether the time is short or not.

  Start opening winning combination designation command (first start opening winning combination designation command or second start opening winning combination designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number As in the notification command), the effect control command received from the main substrate 11 when the start winning combination occurs is also referred to as a command at the start winning combination. In addition, the first holding storage number notification command, the second holding storage number notification command, the first starting opening winning combination designation command, and the second starting opening winning combination designation command are also referred to as holding storage information. Further, the symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When the reception command is sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, the reception command is any of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command. It may be stored without distinction, and each received command may be distinguished and stored at the top of the free space in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when the reception command is sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, which of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the second pending storage number notification command is the reception command It may be stored without distinction, and each received command may be distinguished and stored at the top of the free space in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S75 of FIG. 20 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prize effect determination process (S150). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S150 of FIG. 22 as the effect determination process at the time of winning.

  In the effect determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 120 for effect control first stores the storage content in the start winning at receiving command buffer (the first start winning receiving command buffer 194A or the second start winning receiving command buffer 194B). A check is made (S151), and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received as a new reception command (S152). When it is determined in S152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (S152; No), the storage content in the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B is checked (S153), and as a new reception command, It is determined whether the second starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (S153). When it is determined in S154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (S154; No), the effect determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

  If it is determined in S152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (S152; Yes), it is specified that the time saving is not performed in the processing of S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 (S155 : NO), The 1st pending production decision processing is executed (S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as an additional display mode) of the hold display when the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL is additionally displayed. In addition, in the case of executing a hold change effect or a hold change change effect on the hold display when additionally displaying in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, whether the hold change effect or the hold change case effect is executed in the corresponding step A process of determining whether or not the process is performed, or a process of determining the execution timing of the hold effect when it is determined that the hold effect is to be performed may be performed.

  First, the determination process of determining the display mode of the hold display when additionally displaying in the first start winning storage display area 5HL will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of pending display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 24 (A) shows the pending display mode selected when the variation category "PA1 (shortened / not reached lost)" or the variation category "PA2 (not reached (missed))" among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by a determination table. FIG. 24B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the seven types described above ( H-TBL2). FIG. 24C shows the setting of the display ratio determination ratio of the suspension display according to the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (loss))” among the seven types described above. An example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 24D shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (loss))” among the above seven types. FIG. 24E shows the display of the pending display by the pending display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the seven types described above. Fig. 24F is a setting example (H-TBL5) of the determination ratio of the aspect, and Fig. 24 (F) is a suspension selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by a display mode determination table. (G) of FIG. It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by the pending | holding display mode determination table selected when it is "(beta) (big hit)."

  According to FIG. 24, the display mode of the hold display is determined by each of the tables (A) to (G), but the type of display mode to be determined is the normal display mode, the first specific display mode, It is roughly divided into three of the second specific display mode. The normal display mode is "sphere". The first specific display mode is a display mode (also referred to as a text icon) of an icon shape using “text”. The second specific display mode is a display mode (also referred to as a character icon) of an icon shape using a "character" composed of a "human-type character". Examples of "spheres" are shown in FIGS. 29A-36B. Examples of the “character icon” are shown in FIGS. 41 and 43. Examples of the "character icon" are shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. The icon-like hold display such as "character icon" and "character icon" is used for presentation as hold display of a specific display mode of a type different from the normal display mode by a general "sphere".

  In the pending display mode determination table of FIG. 24, when the pending display of the pending storage to be determined is determined to be the display mode of the character icon, the display mode of a predetermined character icon (for example, display at the time of appearance After the hold display is made to appear in the mode), either the hold display mode change effect or the change-correspondence display mode change effect may be executed corresponding to the hold storage in which the hold display is made. The pending display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that indicates that the display mode of the character changes during the pending display after the pending display by the character icon appears and displayed in the normal display mode (for example, It is an effect which suggests that it changes from the character of a normal display mode to the character of the specific display mode of "a chance" or "excessive heat". The variation-responsive display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that suggests that the display mode of the character icon changes similarly during active display (during display in the active display area AHA) corresponding to the hold display by the character icon It is. The pending display mode change effect and the variation-responsive display mode change effect may be collectively referred to as a display mode change effect. A specific example of the pending display mode change effect by the character icon and the variation-responsive display mode change effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the table of FIG. 24, when the hold display of the target hold storage is determined to be the display mode of the character icon, the hold display is performed in a display mode of a predetermined character icon (for example, a display mode at appearance of one character). After appearing, either of the pending display mode change presentation and the variation-responsive display mode change presentation may be executed in response to the pending storage for which the pending display has been made. The on-hold display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that indicates that the display mode of the character changes during the on-hold display after the on-hold display by the character icon appears and displayed in the normal display mode (for example, one character Is an effect that suggests changing to a specific display mode such as two characters or three characters. The variation-responsive display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect that suggests that the display mode of the character icon changes similarly during active display corresponding to the hold display. A specific example of the pending display mode change effect by the character icon and the variation-responsive display mode change effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The suspension display of "sphere" is displayed as "red sphere", "yellow sphere", "blue sphere" and "white sphere" on each table in FIG. For example, red and yellow are more likely to be determined when the "sphere" is to be reached, compared to the case where the reach is reached, and blue and white (initial colors) are less likely to be determined. In the case of a reach, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), red and yellow are more easily determined than when it is not hot (for example, normal reach), and blue and white are less likely to be determined. ing. Or according to FIG. 16, FIG. 17 and FIG. 24, when the special figure display result is "big hit" red or yellow is more easily determined than when the special figure display result is "loss", blue or White is difficult to determine. In other words, the red and yellow display modes have a high degree of expectation for performing a hot effect and a high probability of becoming a big hit, as compared with the blue and white display modes. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the degree of expectation for performing hot effects and the degree of expectation for becoming a big hit are high.

  The display mode of the hold display of the character icon is displayed as "character" in each table of FIG. If it is determined to be "character", the newly added pending display will be the display mode (normal display mode) of the character icon, and the above-mentioned pending corresponding to the pending storage where the pending display is made Either of the display mode change effect and the variation-responsive display mode change effect may be performed.

  The display mode of the hold display of the character icon is displayed as "Charakura" in each table of FIG. When it is determined to be "character", the newly added pending display is the display mode (normal display mode) of the character icon, and the above-described pending corresponding to the pending storage on which the pending display is made. Either of the display mode change effect and the variation-responsive display mode change effect may be performed.

  According to the table of FIG. 24, as understood from the determination ratio of the random number MR6, the more the expectation of the jackpot is the higher the fluctuation display, the more the display displayed by the character icon or the display displayed by the character icon is selected. The rate is high. In this example, the higher the expectation of becoming a big hit, the higher the percentage of selection of the hold display by the character icon than the hold display by the character icon.

  In the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 sets the plurality of hold display mode determination tables shown in FIG. 24 based on the change category specified by the change category command transmitted from the main substrate 11. The pending display mode decision table to be used is selected from among them, and the pending display display area 5HL is additionally displayed based on the selected pending display mode decision table and the random number value MR6 for deciding the display mode for the pending display. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the display is determined. As a result, the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start prize storage display area 5HL is determined to be any one of "sphere", "character icon" and "character icon", and in addition, "ball" In the case of "", the color is determined.

  After executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). Specifically, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control first displays the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process, the first corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The determination content (the display mode at the time of addition) of the first holding effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the on-hold change effect in the first on-hold effect determination process for the on-hold display of the “ball”, and determines to execute on-off change effect. The first start winning reception command buffer corresponding to the determination content of the determination process (execution timing when executing hold change effect, execution timing when execute hold change cassette effect, execution timing when execute hold change) Content of determination of the hold production determination process (for example, information indicating that hold change production is to be performed (eg, a flag), hold change gusset production, in association with the buffer number of the first preread notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number in 194A) Information indicating execution (for example, a flag), information indicating that a pending change is to be performed (for example, a flag), and Information (for example, corresponding to the first start winning buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A) specifying the holding indication (that is, the holding indication due to the first start winning combination) as the stay display as the holding effect And the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C).

  In this case, for example, in the first holding effect determination process at the time of the first start winning combination of the first special figure holding memory number 3rd, the display mode "white" at the time of addition, holding effect "execution available (with hold change effect execution) If the execution timing is determined as “next change”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning receive command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). Is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number “3”) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to “1” and stores the display mode “white” at the time of addition, and the first corresponding to the execution timing “next change” 1) The buffer number (buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number "1") in the start winning reception command buffer 194A It may be stored and "1") information and buffer number '3' indicating running held change effect in association with the.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the on-hold change effect in the first on-hold effect determination process for the on-hold display of the “ball”, the first start corresponding to the execution timing of the first on-off effect determination process Only the information specifying the target hold display (the hold display by the first start winning) is stored in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number in the winning reception command buffer 194A. (It is not necessary to store information indicating that the on-hold change effect is to be performed).

  After executing the process of S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (S160) (the buffer for the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A) To add a new hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number A process is performed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning storage display area 5HL to display a hold display according to the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described first read advance notice buffer 194C. The first hold effect is set by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the set effect control pattern, to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc., while setting the control pattern as the use pattern. A hold display according to the addition display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  When it is determined in S154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time saving is specified in the processing of S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 (S156: YES ), The second holding effect determination process is executed (S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as an additional display mode) of the hold display when the second start winning storage display area 5HR is additionally displayed. As a result, the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start prize storage display area 5HR is determined to be one of "sphere", "character icon" and "character icon", and in addition, "ball" In the case of "", the color is determined. In addition, in the case of executing hold change effect or hold change change effect on the hold display when additionally displaying in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, in the step, whether hold change effect or hold change case effect is executed A process of determining whether or not the process is performed, or a process of determining the execution timing of the hold effect when it is determined that the hold effect is to be performed may be performed.

  The processing of each of S163, S164, and S165 pertaining to the second starting opening winning is similar to the processing pertaining to each of the processing of each of S160, S161, and S162 pertaining to the first starting opening winning, and "" Can be read as "second", and the code can be read in response to the read, so the description will be omitted.

  If it is determined in S152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (S152: Yes), and it is specified that the time is short in the processing of S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 (S155: YES), The effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL to the initial color (white), and the storage contents in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The first hold display of the white display mode is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in association with the same buffer number as the corresponding buffer number (S166). Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  When it is determined that the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received in S154 (S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time saving is not performed in the processing of S513 in the command analysis processing of FIG. 21 (S156: YES The effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR as the normal display (white ball), and in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. The second hold display of the display mode of the normal display (white ball) is added to the second start winning storage display area 5HR in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the storage content (S166). Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  After executing the winning a prize determination process of S150 shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, for example, according to the value of the rendering process flag provided in the rendering control flag setting unit 191 etc., the following S170 to 177 Select and execute one of the processes.

  The variable display start waiting process of S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 5 is to be started. When it is determined that variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol on image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by first special symbol display device 4A or second special symbol display device 4B. Processing to determine the finalized decoration pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. in order to perform variable display of other various display operations, or by shifting the first hold display or the second hold display A process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to an active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a production mode of various performances or various performances (for example, active display which is a main preview production) It includes a process of determining a change effect, and an effect mode of the active display change effect). Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process, corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. The various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed. Specifically, based on the read control data, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 to display the image signal on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the voice control board 13 Then, control of various effects such as control of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control of outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on / off / flash the lamp 9 is executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or in response to the fact that the symbol determination command transmitted from main substrate 11 is received, etc. The finalized stop symbol is displayed as a final stop symbol which is the result of the variable symbol display of the symbol. If the finalized display is made to display the finalized decorative symbol in response to the end code being read out from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed, Even if the effect control command from the main substrate 11 is not used, the finalized display design can be derived and displayed autonomously on the side of the effect control substrate 12 to fix the variable display result. When the determined decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  In S173, the process for waiting for a special figure is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "3." In the special-image-per-wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designating command designates the start of the big hit gaming state when the hit start designating command is received, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the big hit during the presentation processing “6”. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect processing. Update to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "loss", and the value of the effect process flag is an initial value. Update to "0".

  The small hitting middle effect process of S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this small hitting medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, the effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and changes the variable of S172. Similar to the effect processing during display, various effects control in the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the hitting end designation command from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the small hitting end effect. .

  The small hitting end effect process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the setting contents, and changes the variable of S172. Similar to the effect processing during display, various effects control at the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  The big hit inside effect process of S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit, during the effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and displays variable in S172. Similar to the effect processing, various effects control in the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Further, in the big hit internal effect processing, for example, in response to the hit end designation command from the main substrate 11 being received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process of S177 is a process performed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the setting contents, and effects variable display in S172. Similar to the processing, various effects control at the end of the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal or the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S171 of FIG. 22 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, and the special view display result is "lost". It is determined whether or not (S522). When it is determined that the special view display result is "loss" (S522; Yes), the designated fluctuation pattern is, for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 or the like. It is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, "PA1-1" "PA2-1" "PA2-2" "PA2-3" of FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach". It is determined whether or not (S523).

  If it is determined in S523 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (S523; Yes), a combination of finalized design symbols to be the final stop design constituting the non-reach combination is determined (S524). As an example, in the process of S524, first, numerical data indicating a left determined symbol determination random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data representing a random number for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to and the like, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting or the like in the right determined symbol determination table. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 etc. The determined fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined by referring to the symbol etc. In the process of S524, it is sufficient to determine the determined decorative symbol of the non-reach combination to be the predetermined chance symbol, corresponding to the case where the variable symbol advance is being executed.

  If it is determined in S523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (S523; No), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (S525). As an example, in the process of S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining left and right fixed symbols, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Symbols displayed by stopping on the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the finalized decorative symbols by referring to a predetermined left / right fixed symbol determination table etc. The number determines the same decorative pattern. Furthermore, numerical data representing a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 etc. By referring to the determined decoration pattern, the determined decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes identical to the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, etc., the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in S522 that the special view display result is not "losing" (S522; No), the special view display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or the special view display result is " It is determined whether it is a "small hit" or a case other than these (S526). When it is determined to be "probable" or "small hit" (S526; Yes), for example, the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "probable" or "small hit", such as an open chance eye The combination of is determined (S527). In this case, numerical data representing a random number value for determining a chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The combination of the finalized decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined by referring to and the like.

  When it is determined in S526 that "non-probability" or "probability" other than "probable" or "small hit" (S526; No), the combination of the finalized design that constitutes the big hit combination is determined (S528). As an example, in the process of S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the big hit determined to be updated by the random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and then predetermined data stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like Symbols displayed by stopping on the screen of the image display device 5 in a uniform manner in the display symbols 5L, 5C, 5R on the screen of the image display 5 by referring to the big hit decision symbol determination table etc. The number determines the same decorative pattern. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", the presence or absence of the promotion effect in the jackpot, etc., a determination may be made to set a different decoration pattern as the determined decoration pattern.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability", any one decorative pattern is selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols, and it is decided to be a definite decorative pattern that constitutes a non-probable large hit combination. Just do it. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probable variation", any one decorative pattern is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probable patterns, and a finalized decorative symbol forming a non-probable big hit combination or a positive variation big hit combination You can decide on At this time, when it is decided to the fixed decoration symbol of the non-probability variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probability variation state in re-lottery production in the variable display is not done, it is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state It should just be notified that it is controlled to a definite change state by a jackpot promotion promotion etc. On the other hand, when it is determined to the definite decoration symbol of the big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the positive change state is performed in the re-lottery production in the variable display or without performing the re-lottery production.

  When it is specified that the time is not short in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S155: NO), the reserve digest process is executed after performing any of the processes of S524, S525, S527, and S528. (S531). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the present decorative symbol is linked to the first special figure game), the first start winning memory display area The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the 5HL is displayed on the active display area AHA (a special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL ). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL to the active display area AHA and causes the active display to be displayed. By setting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the set effect control pattern, to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc., and so on. Active display area AHA displays an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of area 5HL. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special drawing game.

  Further, in the process of S531, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 starts the other hold display at the first start. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start pay storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start pay storage display area 5HR.

  After the process of S531 is performed, an effect execution setting process is performed (S532). In the effect execution setting process (S532), a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change presentation for the active display corresponding to the change when the pending display is determined to be "sphere", when executing In the process of determining the type of the active display change presentation, the process of determining the presentation mode of the active display change presentation when executed, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change presentation when executed, and these processing results. The process etc. which set a production control pattern based on (or reset) are included.

  In addition, in the effect execution setting process (S532), a display mode change effect execution timing selection process when the newly displayed pending display is determined to be a display mode of an icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon. The display mode change effect type selection process, the icon effect setting process for executing the change mode selection process, the process for setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the process results, and the like are further included.

  The display mode change effect execution timing selection process is an execution timing of a display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-responsive display mode change effect) corresponding to the pending storage in which the pending display is displayed in the icon shape of the character icon or character icon. Is a process of selecting and deciding. As shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and (C) etc., the execution timing of such a suspension display is, for example, during suspension display after the first suspension display shift after the suspension display corresponding to the suspension storage appears. And the timing during the active display corresponding to the pending storage.

  The display mode change effect type selection process selects and determines the type of display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variation-responsive display mode change effect) of the pending display or active display of the icon shape of "character" or "character". It is a process. As shown in FIGS. 26 (D) and (E) etc., the type of such display mode change effect is selected and determined as any of the first change effect to the fourth change effect.

  The change mode selection process selects and decides the presentation mode of the display mode change presentation of the display of the icon shape of "character" or "character" (the suspension display mode change presentation or the variation-responsive display mode change presentation) or the display mode of the active display. It is a process. As shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M) etc., the effect modes of the display mode change effect of the character icon (pending display mode change effect or change-responsive display mode change effect) are "no change" and "appropriate" display It is selected and decided on either of and "superheating" display. The presentation mode of the display mode change presentation of the character icon (pending display mode change presentation or change corresponding display mode change presentation) is selected and determined to be "no change", "2 people" display or "3 people" display. Ru.

  After the process of S532 is performed, the execution setting of the effect during the other variable display is performed (S533). As an example, in the process of S533, the execution setting of "one-shot notification effect" may be performed to immediately notify (determinately notify) that the variable display result will be "big hit" by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission . An example of the jackpot notification sound is an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, and the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp which constitutes the light emitting member 9 CC. Also, in the process of S533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", for example, effects may be set to be executed in a predetermined manner for bustling. For example, an effect may be set to be performed such that a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, the light emitting members 9SL and 9SR) emits light.

  After the process of S533 is executed, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set, for example, corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command (S534). Subsequently, the variable display etc. start setting process is carried out to make settings for starting the fluctuation of the decorative design etc. in the image display device 5 (S535). For example, the image display device is transmitted by transmitting a display control instruction specified by the display control data to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like included in the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern in the effect execution setting process of S532. The sound output of the speaker 8 is made by transmitting to the sound control board 13 the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of 5 and transmitting the effect sound signal designated by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13 A setting for starting light emission in the lamp 9 is performed by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 a setting for starting, an illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern, and the like.

  After executing the processing of S535, the commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning reception command buffer 194B are digested (S536). Specifically, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special view game, effect control CPU 120 is the smallest of the commands associated with first start winning reception command buffer 194A. Command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning reception command buffer. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands is deleted and deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the command, shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  Further, in the process of S536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first read advance notice buffer 194C or the second read notice notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also performed according to the deletion or shift of the command. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (S537), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the change, and a process of determining the type of the active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active A process of determining whether to execute the display change effect will be described.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a hold selection effect pattern table. In particular, FIG. 26A shows a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table. In FIGS. 26B to 26M, the display mode change effect execution timing selection process, the display mode change effect type selection, when the hold display is determined to the display mode of the icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon. They are various data tables used for processing and the icon production setting processing which performs change mode selection processing.

  Specifically, in the setting example of FIG. 26A, when the display mode of the hold display is determined to be “sphere”, whether or not to execute the active display change effect or the type of the active display change effect (which It is an example of setting of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect of active display change presentation when performing active display change presentation (is performed). In the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of active display change presentation are “execution present” and “execution not present” Are assigned at the determination rates as shown in FIG. In addition, in the "present" of the active display change presentation execution presence / absence decision table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR7 (not shown) for decision is "first system change presentation" and Each of the second system change effect and the first system change effect and the second system change effect is allocated at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 26 (A). Further, the first system change effect includes a plurality of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect acting on the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect acting on the display mode of the active display frame, and the first system change effect The target acting on the second system change effect is different.

  In addition, "execution yes" "first system change production" indicates that the first system change production is performed as an active display change presentation, "execution yes" "second system change presentation" is the second system change production "Execute" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" represent the effect of performing as an active display change effect, and the active display change is a change effect of both the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect. Indicates that the effect is to be made. Also, "execution not performed" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, fluctuation pattern 1-X represents fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2 and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 illustrated in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, and PA4-3 illustrated in FIG. It represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 26A, when the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (variable display) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PA1-X, PA2-X, “100%” indicates that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the said fluctuation | variation is non-reach (loss), it represents not performing an active display change presentation.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, or PB5-X, the fluctuation pattern PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X is used. The rate at which “no execution” is determined is lower than in some cases. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is performed when the "big hit" occurs in the change is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is performed when the "losing" occurs in the change. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the "big hit" is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, or PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns are PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the ratio at which the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" are determined when "execution" is determined is high. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, the ratio at which the "first system change rendition and the second system change rendition" are determined when "performed" is determined is about 57% (40/70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the ratio at which the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are determined when “execution yes” is determined is about 33% (10 × 30) It is. Or, more specifically, whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is any of fluctuation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X or which of fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X The difference (or ratio) of the rate at which the “first system change rendition and the second system change rendition” are determined is the change pattern of the change designated by the change pattern designation command. It is larger than the difference of the ratio in which the "first system change rendition" or the "second system change rendition" is determined depending on which X is any of the fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, when it is fluctuation pattern PB3-X, the proportion at which "first system change effect and second system change effect" are determined and when it is fluctuation pattern PA3-X, "first system change effect and second system change" While the difference with the rate at which the effect is determined is 30% (40% to 10%), the rate at which the “first system change effect” is determined in the case of the change pattern PB3-X and the change pattern When it is PA3-X, the difference from the rate at which the "first system change rendition" is determined is 5% (15% to 10%). That is, when the first system change rendition and the second system change rendition are performed, the degree of expectation of being a "big hit" is higher than when not.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is fluctuation pattern PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, it is fluctuation pattern PA3-X, PB3-X. Compared to the case, the rate at which “no execution” is determined is low. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when becoming the super reach in the change is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is performed when the normal reach is in the change. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of becoming a super reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  Similarly, when the first system change rendition and the second system change rendition are performed, the degree of expectation of becoming a super reach is higher than when not.

  FIG. 26B is a character hold display time change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined to the display mode of the character icon. In FIG. 26B, the selection of the relationship that the random number MR10 for determining the display mode change effect timing is "during display> active display" at the two types of display mode change presentation timings of the pending display and the active display. It is allocated by percentage.

  FIG. 26C is a character hold display time change presentation timing selection table used when the hold display is determined to the display mode of the character icon. In FIG. 26C, the random number value MR10 for display mode change effect timing selection is selected at the selection ratio of “hold display <active display in progress” at the two types of change effect timings of the hold display and the active display. It is allocated.

  According to FIGS. 26B and 26C, when the hold display is in the display mode of the character icon, the person in the hold display is more active than in the display mode of the character icon. The rate at which the display mode change effect is executed is also high. On the other hand, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio in which the display mode change effect is executed in the active display than in the hold display, as compared to the time when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Is high. Thereby, the player is made to pay attention to the display type (for example, display type such as a character icon or character icon) of the change target of the display mode change effect and the timing of the display mode change (for example, timings during hold display and active display) It is possible to improve the interest of the game for the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

  In addition, with regard to the display of character icons and the display of character icons, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M) described later, the ratio at which the display mode actually changes after execution of the display mode change effect is pending display Equal in middle and active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, compared to the display mode of the character icon, the rate at which the display mode change effect is executed is higher in the hold display than in the active display, When the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio in which the display mode change effect is executed is higher in the active display than in the hold display, as compared to when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Because, depending on whether the hold display is displayed as a character icon display or a character icon display, the frequency at which the icon display mode changes changes between the hold display and the active display. The ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode is different between in the pending display mode and in the active display mode. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the type of display of the change target and the timing of the display mode change for the change of the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the display mode change of the active display. Can improve the interest of the game about the change of

  FIG. 26D is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. As a type of change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, a blue arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display (a first change effect may be referred to as a blue effect) A second change effect (sometimes referred to as red effect) in which a red arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display is provided so as to be selectable. The first change effect and the second change effect differ in the selection ratio of the change mode of the icon display after the display mode change effect is executed. For example, the second change effect (red effect) is the first change effect (blue effect The selection ratio of the change aspect having a high degree of expectation to be a big hit than the) is set high (see FIGS. 26F to 26I). In FIG. 26 (D), the random number MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type is allocated to the first change effect and the second change effect at a selection ratio of the relation of “first change effect = second change effect”. It is done.

  FIG. 26E is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. As a type of display mode change effect when a hold display by a character icon is executed, a blue arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display (third change may be referred to as blue effect) An effect and a fourth change effect (sometimes referred to as a red effect) in which a red arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display are provided so as to be selectable. The third change effect and the fourth change effect differ in the selection ratio of the change mode of the icon display after the display mode change effect is executed. For example, the fourth change effect (red effect) is the third change effect (blue effect The selection ratio of the change aspect having a high expectation to be a big hit than the) is set high (see FIG. 26 (J) to (M)). In FIG. 26E, the random number MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type is allocated to the third change effect and the fourth change effect at a selection ratio of the relation of “third change effect = fourth change effect”. It is done.

  26 (F) to 26 (I) show the display mode change presentation timing and the display mode selected and determined by the data table of FIG. 26 (B) and FIG. 26 (D) for the change effect of the suspension display by the character icon It is a change selection table used when selecting and determining the change aspect of an icon display according to a combination with a change production kind. In these change selection tables, the change mode is divided into “no change”, “appropriate” display, and “superheat” display, separately when the display result of the variable display is the big hit display result and when it is the lost display result. The random number MR12 for selection is allocated at different selection rates.

  FIG. 26F is a first change presentation pending display change selection table used when the display mode change presentation timing is selected and determined as pending display and the display mode change presentation type is selected and determined as the first change presentation is there. FIG. 26G is a first change presentation active display change selection table used when the display mode change presentation timing is selected and determined as active display and the display mode change presentation type is selected and determined as the first change presentation is there. FIG. 26H shows a second change presentation pending display change selection table used when the display mode change presentation timing is selected and determined during the hold display, and the display mode change presentation type is selected and determined as the second change presentation. is there. FIG. 26I shows a second change presentation active display change selection table used when the display mode change presentation timing is selected and determined during active display, and the display mode change presentation type is selected and determined as the second change presentation. is there.

  In FIGS. 26F to 26I, "No change" indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and "Opportunity" display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to an icon of the word "Opportunity" The display of "excessive heat" indicates that the character icon changes to an icon of the character "excessive heat".

  In FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I), when the random number value MR12 for change selection is the big hit display result, "no change <probability + intense heat (with change)" and when the loss display result is "change" It is allocated by the selection rate of the relation "no opportunity + intense heat (with change)". Also, in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I), the random number value MR12 is selected at the selection rate of the relationship of “opportunity <excessive heat” when the jackpot display result is obtained and “opportunity> excessive heat” when the loss display result is obtained. It is allocated. As a result, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation of the big hit display result is higher than when the character icon does not change. In addition, when the character icon changes to "superheat", the degree of expectation that the big hit display result is high is higher than when the character icon changes to "appropriate".

  In (G) and (I) of FIG. 26 (G) and (I) which are used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during active display when the character mode is on hold display, the display mode change effect timing is selected during the hold display Compared with FIGS. 26F and 26H used when determined, the selection ratio of the "superheat" display is set higher when the big hit display result is obtained.

  With such a setting, as for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is lower than during the hold display during active display. When a big hit result is displayed, the ratio of the display mode change to be the "super heat" display is selected, which is higher in the level of expectation that is a big hit than the "appropriate" display compared to the pending display during active display. high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the aspect of the display aspect change of the icon display from the display type of the display aspect change target and the change timing to be selected.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (I), the second change effect (red effect) is better than the first change effect (blue effect) when the big hit display result is obtained. The rate at which heat (with change) is displayed is high. As a result, when "Aptitude or heat (with change)" is displayed by the second change effect (red effect), "Aptitude or heat (with change)" is displayed by the first change effect (blue effect). In this case, the degree of expectation of the jackpot display result is higher than that of the player, and the player's expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced.

  In addition, the first change effect (blue effect) and the second change effect (red effect) differ in the ratio at which “Aptitude or intense heat (with change)” is displayed, so that the icon display is on hold Alternatively, the player can be made to pay attention to the change mode during the active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  26 (J) to 26 (M) show the display mode change effect timing selected and determined by the data tables of FIG. 26 (B) and FIG. 26 (D) for the display mode change effect of the suspension display by the character icon It is a change selection table used when selecting and determining the change mode of an icon display according to a combination with a display mode change production kind. In these effect selection tables, when the display result of the variable display is a big hit display result and when it is a lost display result, it changes into “no change”, “two people” display, and “three people” display The random number MR12 for selection is allocated at different selection rates.

  FIG. 26J is a third change presentation pending display change selection table used when the change presentation timing is selected and determined as pending display and the display mode change presentation type is selected and determined as the third change presentation. FIG. 26 (K) is a third change presentation active display change selection table used when the display mode change presentation timing is selected and determined as active display and the display mode change presentation type is selected and determined as the third change presentation is there. FIG. 26 (L) is a fourth change production hold display change selection table used when the display type change production timing is selected and determined as being on hold display and the display type change production type is selected and determined for the fourth change production is there. FIG. 26 (M) is a fourth change presentation active display change selection table used when the display mode change presentation timing is selected and determined as active display and the display mode change presentation type is selected and determined as the fourth change presentation is there.

  In FIGS. 26J to 26M, "no change" indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and "two" display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to a "two" icon. The "three" display indicates that the character changes to the "three" icon.

  In (J) to (M) in FIG. 26, when the random number value MR12 for change selection is the big hit display result, "no change <2 + 3 people (with change)", and when the loss display result is "change" It is assigned by the selection rate of the relationship "no> 2 + 3 (with change)". Also, in 26 (J) to (M), the random number value MR12 is selected at the selection rate of the relationship of “two people <three people” when the big hit display result is obtained and “2 people> 3 people” when the loss display result is obtained. Is allocated. As a result, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation of the big hit display result is higher than when the character icon does not change. In addition, when the character icon changes to "three", the degree of expectation of the big hit display result is higher than when the character icon changes to "two".

  When the change display timing is selected and determined during the hold display when the hold display is performed by the character icon in FIGS. 26J and 26L, when the change presentation timing is selected and determined during the hold display As compared with FIGS. 26 (K) and (M) used for the case, the selection ratio of the “three people” display is set higher when the big hit display result is obtained.

  With such a setting, as for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is lower than that during active display during the hold display. Percentage of the display mode change selected to be “three people” display when the level of expectation that is a big hit is higher than “two people” display compared to active display during hold display when becoming a big hit display result Is high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the aspect of the display aspect change of the icon display from the display type of the display aspect change target and the change timing to be selected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 26J to 26M, when the big hit display result is obtained, “2 people are compared with the fourth change effect (red effect) in comparison with the third change effect (blue effect). Or "3 people (with change)" display rate is high. Thus, when "2 or 3 (with change)" is displayed by the fourth change effect (red effect), "2 or 3 people (with change)" is displayed by the third change effect (blue effect). The degree of expectation that results in the jackpot display result is higher than when the display is performed, and the player's expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced.

  In addition, because the ratio in which "two or three people (with change)" is displayed differs between the third change effect (blue effect) and the fourth change effect (red effect), the pending display of the icon display Alternatively, the player can be made to pay attention to the change mode during the active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Here, returning to FIG. 25 again, the variable display start setting process will be described continuously. In the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 may select the hold display by the character icon or the character icon according to the hold display mode determination table of FIG. 24 as the newly appeared hold display. At this time, for example, processing for realizing a display mode change effect with the effect contents selected and determined as described with reference to FIGS. 26 (B) to (M) is executed. For example, when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being on hold display in FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C), the on-hold display is shifted according to the on hold in the variable display started from now As described above, setting processing is performed to execute the display mode change presentation with the presentation contents selected and determined.

  On the other hand, in the effect execution setting process (S532), when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display in FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C), the active display corresponding to the pending storage to be the effect target The data specifying the content of the effect selected and determined as described above is associated with the data of the buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the pending storage to be the effect until the time the is executed. The display mode change provided in the RAM 122 is data for storing the change effect specifying data during active display designating execution of the display mode change effect, and specifying the contents of the effect selected and determined as described above. It is stored in the effect storage area. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation display to be started from now on is the fluctuation display corresponding to the pending storage of the effect object designated by the change effect designation data during active display in S532 of the effect execution setting processing Is determined, and when it is determined that the variable display corresponds to the pending storage of the effect object, the display mode change during active display based on the data specifying the content of the effect stored in the display mode change effect storage area Make a presentation.

  When the display mode of the hold display is selected by the character icon or the character icon in the effect execution setting process (S532) by executing the process as described above, and the display mode change effect is executed, the display mode During the first hold display after the hold display to be changed appears, or during active display when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is executed, effect execution setting processing (S532) The display mode change effect is executed based on the effect setting in the above.

  Further, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 controls the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table and the random number MR7 for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect with respect to the pending display displayed as "sphere". In the case of executing active display change rendition whether or not active display change rendition is to be executed by the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the corresponding fluctuation (the corresponding variable display) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, It determines which active display change presentation is performed among the production | presentation aspects of several active display change presentation.

  In addition, CPU120 for production control first decides execution presence or absence of active indication change production, when it decides with “execution yes” “first system change presentation” or “second system change presentation” or “first system change presentation” And “the second system change effect” may be determined.

  Next, the process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed in the case of the active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect will be described. FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27B is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. Further, FIG. 27 (C) shows the determination ratio of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are both executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting.

  In the illustrated example, fluctuation pattern 1-X represents fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2 and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The variation pattern PA3-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 represents the variation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2 and PA4 shown in FIG. -3, represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern as an effect aspect of four types of first system change effects according to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5. In addition, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect modes of three types of second system change effects according to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5. In addition, the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect modes of 12 types of first system change effects and second system change effects corresponding to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5. Do.

  The first system change effect is an effect effect that changes the display mode of the active display for the active display, for example, an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display. In FIG. 27A, assuming that the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is "sphere" as the default, the display shape of the active display change pattern "BP1" is "ball". It is an effect pattern of failure effect (active display change false effect effect) which is not changed as it is. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is the hot reach (for example, super reach). In addition, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the “big hit” variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP2" is an effect of a successful effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape of "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "triangle". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP3" is an effect of a successful effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape of "sphere" to the display shape of "pentagonal" active display. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) for which “losing” occurs. Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the percentage of decisions is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP4" is an effect of a successful effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "star". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach). In addition, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) for which “losing” occurs.

  The second system change effect is an effect effect that changes the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, for example, an effect effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame. In FIG. 27B, assuming that the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change is “normal” as the default for the active display change effect pattern “CP1”, the active display frame It is a rendering pattern of failure rendering (active display change cassette rendering) in which the thickness of the line of “normal” is not changed. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is the hot reach (for example, super reach). In addition, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the “big hit” variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  Further, the active display change effect pattern “CP2” is a effect pattern of a successful effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display from “normal” to “medium-thick”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  Further, the active display change effect pattern “CP3” is a effect pattern of a successful effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change from “normal” to “very thick”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is "big hit" (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is "lost". high. Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  The 1st system change production and the 2nd system change production are the active display which surrounds the active display by the above-mentioned 1st system change production, and the operation production overcoming the change of the display mode of the active display and the above 2nd system change production. It is an operation presentation which performs both of the operation presentation which asks about change of the display mode of a frame. In FIG. 27C, the active display change effect pattern “AP1” is, by default, “ball” in the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change, and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display. Assuming that the "normal" is the display shape of the active display "sphere" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame "normal" does not change the production of the failure effect (active display change Gasse effect) It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is the hot reach (for example, super reach). In addition, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the “big hit” variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  In the active display change effect pattern “AP2”, the display shape of the active display remains “sphere”, and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display changes from “normal” to “medium-thick” successfully. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. high. Also, when it is not hot reach (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is heat reach (for example, super reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "AP3" is a success effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display from "normal" to "very thick" while keeping the display shape of the active display as "sphere". It is an effect pattern of. When the fluctuation pattern is "big hit" (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1) which is "lost". Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern "AP4" is a effect pattern of the effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is not changed as "normal". The effect pattern "AP5" is an effect pattern of effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to "medium thick". AP6 ′ ′ is an effect pattern of an effect aspect in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to “very thick”.

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "AP7" is a effect pattern of the effect aspect that changes the display shape of the active display to "pentagon" and does not change the thickness of the line of the active display frame as "normal". The display change effect pattern "AP8" is a effect pattern of a effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "pentagon" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "middle thick". The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to “very thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern "AP10" is a effect pattern that changes the display shape of the active display to "star" and does not change the thickness of the line of the active display frame as "normal", and is active The display change presentation pattern "AP11" is a presentation pattern of a presentation mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "stars" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "middle thick". The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect aspect that changes the display shape of the active display to “stars” and changes the thickness of the lines of the active display frame to “very thick”.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 sets the random value MR8 for active display change effect pattern determination and the fluctuation pattern (variable display) of the fluctuation (the variable display) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Based on the display pattern, the active display change effect pattern is determined as an effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

  Next, a process of determining the timing of executing the active display change presentation in the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio based on the presentation execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change presentation. Note that the execution timings of a plurality (for example, four) of first system change effects are stored in the ROM 121 according to the 24 variation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the effect execution timings of the first system change effects. I assume. The timing 1 is, for example, a timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation, the timing 2 is a timing at which the first system change effect is performed at the time of the pseudo link fluctuation, and the timing 3 is It is a timing which performs the 1st system change production at the time of reach establishment in the change concerned, and timing 4 is a timing which performs the 1st system change production after the reach establishment (during reach) in the change concerned. The pseudo continuous change time is, for example, a time when the variable display during change is temporarily stopped.

  In addition, fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified as "success expectation degree" small "" indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is "small", and "success expectation degree" medium " In the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 classified into “4”, the expectation for executing the success effect is “medium” higher than the above-mentioned success expectation “small”. Represents In addition, the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified as "Successful Expectation" Large "have the" Large "higher expectation than the success expectation" Medium "for which the success effect is executed. In the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4 classified as “success expectation degree“ maximum ””, the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is the above-mentioned success expectation degree “large”. Represents a higher than "maximum".

  Specifically, in FIG. 27, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are an active display change effect pattern BP1 which is a failure effect of the first system change effect, and an active display which is a failure effect of the second system change effect. The ratio determined as the change display pattern CP1 or the active display change presentation pattern AP1 which is a failure presentation of the first system change production and the second system change production is compared with the ratio determined as the other active display change presentation patterns It is high, the degree of success expectation for which the success presentation can be performed is low, and as described above, it is classified as "the degree of success expectation" small ".

  Further, in FIG. 27, fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 other than the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, and PB4-1 to PB4-4. , PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4 which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3 which are successful effects of the second system change effect, The ratio determined for active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which is a successful effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, is higher than the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. The success expectation degree with which the successful presentation can be performed is higher than the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, due to the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 27, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be performed is high.

  In the example illustrated, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (variable display) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is not a pseudo continuous fluctuation, fluctuation patterns PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5 -1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, and PB5-2 indicate that the first system change effect is not executed at timing 2. According to FIG. 28, when it comes to hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when it is for a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach). In addition, in the case of the fluctuation pattern for the “big hit”, the determination ratio determined at the later timing (for example, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than the fluctuation pattern for the “loss”. In addition, after reach establishment (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the degree of expectation of success rendering is higher than that before reach establishment (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). In addition, after temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the degree of expectation of success effect is higher than before temporary stop of the variable display in pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 1).

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 sets the random value MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation (the variable display) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Based on (variable display pattern), the execution timing of the active display change presentation is determined in the case of executing the active display change presentation.

  At timing 2, immediately after the start of the revariable display, for example, at the start of the first revariable display or at the start of the second revariable display, depending on the number of times of temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous change. The first system change effect may be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at a plurality of execution timings in a plurality of pseudo continuous fluctuations. In addition, timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous change may be after reach establishment, for example, the execution timing is set to set timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous change after timing 3 at the time of reach establishment in FIG. A plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

  Moreover, when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 27, the setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. And the ROM 121 may be stored as one table in association with each other. The same applies to the execution timing of the second system change rendition and the execution timing for executing both the first system change rendition and the second system change rendition.

  In addition, a setting example (not shown) of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change presentation is a setting example of the determination ratio by the presentation execution timing determination table at the time of the first system change presentation execution as shown in FIG. It may be the same, or it may be a setting example of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change presentation different from the setting example of the determination ratio by the presentation execution timing determination table at the time of the first system change presentation execution.

  In addition, when it is determined in FIG. 26 that "the first system change effect and the second system change effect" are to be executed, the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is as shown in FIG. The first system change effect and the second system change effect may be simultaneously determined using the setting example of the determination ratio based on the execution timing determination table so that the first system change effect and the second system change effect are performed at the same timing. The respective execution timings of the system change rendition may be determined collectively so as to be different execution timings. Also, when it is determined in FIG. 26 that “first system change effect and second system change effect” are to be executed, the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 28. The execution timings of the first system change presentation and the second system change presentation may be separately determined using the setting example of the determination ratio based on the presentation execution timing determination table.

  Next, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the presence or absence of execution of the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, and when performing the active display change effect, the active display change The effect pattern of the effect and the execution timing of the active display change effect are set as the effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command as an effect control pattern, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. The pattern is set as an effect control pattern. In addition, when two or more presentation control patterns corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command are prepared, either is selected and it sets as a production control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (S532) is ended.

Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
On the main substrate 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 updates the first pending storage number when the first start condition is met, and the CPU 103 holds the second pending storage number when the second start condition is met. Is updated (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing a random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217). The CPU 103 determines the special view display result using the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (S403, S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special map display result which is the determination result, the number of pending storages updated in S215, and the random value MR3 for variation category determination extracted in S217 (S412). The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command specifying a variation category that is a determination result (S413), and executes command control processing (S17). As a result, a variation category command or the like specifying the variation category determined in S412 is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  Further, on the side of the main substrate 11, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first determines in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111) the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination extracted in S217. While not using the above, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern based on numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination and numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination. The CPU 103 which has determined the fluctuation pattern sets transmission of a fluctuation pattern designation command which designates the fluctuation pattern which is the determination result, and executes a command control process (S17). As a result, a fluctuation pattern designation command or the like for specifying the fluctuation pattern determined in S111 is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second start winning in the hold effect determination process (S160). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when additionally displaying in the storage display area 5HR is determined. In addition, based on the determination result of the hold effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination contents (for example, display mode etc. upon addition) of the hold effect determination process to the first read advance notice buffer 194C or the second read advance notice buffer Along with storing (S161), the suspension display is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second starting winning storage display area 5HR based on the storage content (display mode upon addition) (S162).

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first pre-read advance notice buffer 194C or the second pre-read advance notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display Based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the substrate 11, the effect control pattern is set.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 29A (A) and (e) in FIG. 29B (A) are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 29 (B) and (e) of FIG. 29B (B). In FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Moreover, FIG. 29A (A) and FIG.29B (A) represent the success production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP3 shown to (B) of FIG. 27 as a production | presentation aspect of active display change production. It is assumed that (changed (weight “very thick”)) is set. Moreover, FIG. 29A (B) and FIG.29B (B) represent failure production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP1 shown to (B) of FIG. 27 as a production | presentation aspect of active display change production. It is assumed that (no change (weight "normal")) is set.

  (A) of FIG. 29A (A) is an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started) Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene. Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5. In the active display area AHA, at least an active display AH is displayed, and in addition to the active display AH, a predetermined range including an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH and an active display frame AHW is included. It is also possible to display characters and images in the active display area AHA, such as the active display AH itself and the inside or outside of the active display frame AHW.

  Just before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 29A (A), the hold display (active display AH) is displayed on the buffer number “1” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. The display mode (display mode “white color at the time of addition”) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the start winning combination of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to In the buffer number "2" of the buffer 194C, the display mode (display mode at the time of addition "white") of the hold display H1 determined at the start winning combination of the hold display H1 is stored as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number "3" of the first advance notice buffer 194C is determined at the start winning combination of the hold indication H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold indication H2 The display mode (display mode "white when added") of the hold display H2 is stored, and the buffer number "4" of the first read advance notice buffer 194C is the start of the hold display H3 as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode (display mode at the time of addition "white") of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning is stored.

  The scene in (a) of FIG. 29A (A) starts variable display of active information of active display AH (information corresponding to pending information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA). At the time of setting, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (not reach)” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 After that, the finalized decorative symbols ("3", "9" and "4") are stopped and displayed. When one gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening from the scene of (a) in FIG. 29A (A) and the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first pending storage number to “4”. To “(S215)”. The CPU 103 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217). The special figure display result is determined using the numerical value MR1 or the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S403, S404).

  For example, it is assumed that "loss" is determined as the special map display result. The CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" from among a plurality of variation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special view display result "loss" and the number of pending storages "4" (FIG. 16). And the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" and the variation category determination random number value MR3 for variation category determination (S412). For example, it is assumed that the fluctuation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” is determined. The CPU 103 sets transmission of a change category command specifying the change category “PB5” (S413), and executes the command control process (S17) to change the change category command etc. specifying the change category “PB5”. Are transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  The effect control CPU 120 that receives the variation category command or the like specifying the variation category from the main substrate 11 uses the suspension display mode used from among the plurality of suspension display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variation category. The display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning combination memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode decision table and the random number value MR6 for the display mode decision of the hold display. Determine the display mode). The effect control CPU 120 determines these holding effect determination processes in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning received command buffer 194A. The contents (display mode at the time of addition) are stored.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 29A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning storage display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation for executing the second system change presentation. 29A (A) (c) shows that the second system change effect is performed immediately after the start of variable display in the scene (B) of FIG. 29A (A) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). It is an example. In (c) of FIG. 29A (A), the arrow Y2 on which the character of "superheat" is drawn is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. (A) of FIG. 29A (B) to (c) of FIG. 29A (B) are also similar to (a) of FIG. 29A (A) to (c) of FIG. 29A (A). That is, from (b) in FIG. 29A (A) to (c) in FIG. 29A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 29A (B) to (c) in FIG. It is a common effect that is commonly executed between the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

  Then, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 29A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Is a scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 29B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29A, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW is “very thick”. Is changing as the display mode of. And in the scene of (e) of Drawing 29B (A), the decoration pattern of decoration pattern display area 5L and the decoration pattern of decoration pattern display area 5R are the scenes which become a reach mode.

  On the other hand, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 29A (B), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. It is a scene moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 29B (B), since the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29B, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW is The "Normal" display mode has not changed. And in the scene of (e) of Drawing 29B (B), it is a scene where the decoration pattern of decoration pattern display area 5L and the decoration pattern of decoration pattern display area 5R become a reach mode.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 30A (A) and (e) to (f) in FIG. 30B (A) are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 30B and to (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (B). In FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B, the arrow “内” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative symbol is changing. Moreover, FIG. 30A (A) and FIG. 30B (A) show the success production | presentation of a 1st system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern BP4 shown to (A) of FIG. It is assumed that (changed (shape "star") is set. FIG. 30A (B) and FIG. 30B (B) show failure representation of the first system change presentation, and the active display change presentation pattern BP1 (change shown in (A) of FIG. It is assumed that nothing (shape "ball") is set.

  In (a) of FIG. 30A (A), the active display area AHA is an active display AH (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started) Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  The scene in (a) of FIG. 30A (A) starts variable display of active information of active display AH (information corresponding to pending information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA). At the time of setting, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (not reach)” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 After that, the finalized decorative symbols ("3", "9" and "4") are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of (b) in FIG. 30A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning storage display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 30A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a change for executing the first system change effect. The scene (b) in FIG. 30A (A) is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the start of variable display (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). In (b) of FIG. 30A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as the first systematic change effect.

  Then, in the scene of (c) of FIG. 30A (A), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene of (b) of FIG. 30A (A) points toward the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue moving. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 30A (A), the group of figures Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (c) of FIG. Among the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 constituting the group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears, and only the star Z1 continues moving. (A) of FIG. 30A (B) to (d) of FIG. 30A (B) are also similar to (a) of FIG. 30A (A) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A). In other words, (b) of FIG. 30A (A) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A) and (b) of FIG. 30A (B) to (d) of FIG. It is a common effect that is commonly executed between the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

  The scene (e) in FIG. 30B (A) is the star Z1 left without disappearing in the graphic group Y1, which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) in FIG. 30A (A). It is a scene which moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH. In the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (A), after the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene of (e) of FIG. The display shape is displayed in a display mode changed to "star". Then, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative pattern of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative pattern of the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  On the other hand, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 left without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first systematic change effect displayed in the scene of (d) of FIG. It is a scene which moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 but disappears before it collides with the active display AH. In the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing as the figure group Y1 does not collide with the active display AH in the scene of (e) of FIG. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode as "sphere". And in the scene of (f) of Drawing 30B (B), it is a scene where the decoration pattern of decoration pattern display area 5L and the decoration pattern of decoration pattern display area 5R become a reach mode.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 31A (A) and (e) to (g) in FIG. 31B (A) are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 31 (B) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31 B (B). In FIG. 31A and FIG. 31B, the arrow “内” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative symbol is changing. Also, FIGS. 31A (A) and 31B (A) show the success effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 27C as the effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (changed (thick "very thick"), changed (shape "star")) is set. 31A (B) and FIG. 31B (B) show the failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in (C) of FIG. 27 as the effect mode of the active display change effect It is assumed that the change presentation pattern AP1 (no change (shape “ball”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  31A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  In the scene of (a) of FIG. 31A (A), variable display of active information of active display AH (information corresponding to pending information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA) is started At the time of setting, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (not reach)” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 After that, the finalized decorative symbols ("3", "9" and "4") are stopped and displayed.

  The scene of (b) of FIG. 31A (A) displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area on the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 It is an example when the variable display of AH is started.

  The scene of (b) of FIG. 31A (A) displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area on the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 It is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene of (b) in FIG. 31A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a change for executing the second system change presentation. 31A (A) (c) shows the first system change effect and the second system change effect immediately after the start of variable display in the scene (B) of FIG. 31 A (A) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28) Is an example when is executed. In (c) of FIG. 31A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2 and pentagon Z3) are displayed as figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change As an effect, an arrow Y2 is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 in which the characters of "superheat" are drawn. (A) of FIG. 31A (B) to (c) of FIG. 31A (B) are also similar to (a) of (a) to FIG. 31A (A) of FIG. 31A (A). In other words, (b) of FIG. 31A (A) to (c) of FIG. 31A (A) and (b) of FIG. 31A (B) to (c) of FIG. It is a common effect that is commonly executed between the success effect and the failure effect in the effect and the second system change effect.

  Then, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the figure group Y1, which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. While moving, triangle Z2 disappears, and star Z1 and pentagon Z3 continue moving. Further, a scene where arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) in FIG. 31A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW. It is. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW It changes as a display mode of "very thick". Further, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (d) of FIG. Among the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears, and only the star Z1 continues moving.

  Then, in the scene (f) in FIG. 31B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) in FIG. 30A It is a scene which moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH. In the scene of (g) in FIG. 31B (A), after the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene of (f) in FIG. The display shape is displayed in a display mode changed to "star". And in the scene of (g) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative pattern of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative pattern of the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  On the other hand, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 31A (B), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. It is a scene moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. Further, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 31A (B), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (d) of FIG. Among the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears, and only the star Z1 continues moving. And in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 left without disappearing in the figure group Y1, which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B) It is a scene which moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 but disappears before it collides with the active display AH. In the scene of (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing as the figure group Y1 does not collide with the active display AH in the scene of (f) of FIG. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode as "sphere". Further, in the scene of (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the decorative pattern of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative pattern of the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 32A (A) and (e) to (f) in FIG. 32B (A) are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) in FIG. 32 (B) and (e) to (f) in FIG. 32B (B). In FIG. 32A and FIG. 32B, the arrow “内” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. Moreover, FIG. 32A (A) and FIG. 32B (A) represent the success production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP3 shown to (B) of FIG. 27 as a production | presentation aspect of active display change production. It is assumed that (changed (weight “very thick”)) is set. Moreover, FIG. 32A (B) and FIG. 32B (B) represent failure production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP1 shown to (B) of FIG. 27 as a production | presentation aspect of active display change production. It is assumed that (no change (weight "normal")) is set.

  (A) of FIG. 32A (A) is an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started) Alternatively, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  Just before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 32A (A), the hold display (active display AH) on the buffer number “1” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. The display mode (display mode “white color at the time of addition”) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the start winning combination of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to In the buffer number "2" of the buffer 194C, the display mode (display mode at the time of addition "white") of the hold display H1 determined at the start winning combination of the hold display H1 is stored as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number "3" of the first advance notice buffer 194C is determined at the start winning combination of the hold indication H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold indication H2 The display mode (display mode "white when added") of the hold display H2 is stored, and the buffer number "4" of the first read advance notice buffer 194C is the start of the hold display H3 as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode (display mode at the time of addition "white") of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning is stored.

  The scene in (a) of FIG. 32A (A) starts variable display of active information of active display AH (information corresponding to pending information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA). At the time of setting, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (not reach)” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 After that, the finalized decorative symbols ("3", "9" and "4") are stopped and displayed. When one gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening from the scene of (a) of FIG. 32A (A) and the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first pending storage number to “4”. To “(S215)”. The CPU 103 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (S217). The special figure display result is determined using the numerical value MR1 or the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S403, S404).

  For example, it is assumed that "loss" is determined as the special map display result. The CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" from among a plurality of variation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special view display result "loss" and the number of pending storages "4" (FIG. 16). And the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" and the variation category determination random number value MR3 for variation category determination (S412). For example, it is assumed that the fluctuation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” is determined. The CPU 103 sets transmission of a change category command specifying the change category “PB5” (S413), and executes the command control process (S17) to change the change category command etc. specifying the change category “PB5”. Are transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  The effect control CPU 120 that receives the variation category command or the like specifying the variation category from the main substrate 11 uses the suspension display mode used from among the plurality of suspension display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variation category. The display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning combination memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode decision table and the random number value MR6 for the display mode decision of the hold display. Determine the display mode). The effect control CPU 120 determines these holding effect determination processes in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning received command buffer 194A. The contents (display mode at the time of addition) are stored.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 32A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area is displayed on the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1. It is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation for executing the second system change presentation. In (c) of FIG. 32A (A), reach is established after variable display is started in the scene of (B) of FIG. 32A (A), and the decorative symbol of decorative symbol display area 5L and decorative symbol display area 5R It is a scene where the decorative design is in the reach mode. The scene of (d) in FIG. 32A (A) is an example when the second system change effect is executed after reaching (for example, timing 3 in FIG. 28). In (d) of FIG. 32A (A), the arrow Y2 on which the character of “superheat” is drawn is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. (A) of FIG. 32A (B) to (d) of FIG. 32A (B) are also similar to (a) of (a) to FIG. 32A (A) of FIG. 32A (A). In other words, (b) of FIG. 32A (A) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A) and (b) of FIG. 32A (B) to (d) of FIG. It is a common effect that is commonly executed between the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

  Then, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (d) of FIG. 32A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Is a scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW is “very thick” Is changing as the display mode of.

  On the other hand, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 32A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (d) of FIG. It is a scene moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (B), since the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32B (B), the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW is The "Normal" display mode has not changed. Also for the second system change effect, similarly, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established. In addition, similarly to the first system change effect and the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 33A and (g) to (h) in FIG. 33B are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Moreover, FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B show the success production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP3 (it has change (a thickness) shown in (B) of FIG. It is assumed that "very heavy") is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B and the display operation example shown in FIG. 29A and FIG. The rest is the same, so different parts will be mainly described. Also, the explanation of the failure effect is omitted.

  In (a) of FIG. 33A, when the active display AH is activated (when the variable display is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and it is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

  In (c) of FIG. 33A, the decorative symbol of decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of decorative symbol display area 5R are the reach aspect after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. It is a scene that is stopped and displayed in different display modes. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 33A, the chance symbol described as “a good chance” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5 by low speed scroll, and the chance symbol is displayed in the scene of (e) of FIG. The display area 5C is temporarily stopped. Then, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 33A, all the decoration patterns temporarily stopped are variably displayed (revariable display) again.

  In (g) of FIG. 33B, an arrow Y2 is displayed at the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect, in which the characters of “superheat” are drawn. (A) in FIG. 33A to (g) in FIG. 33B are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

  Then, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 33B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 33B (g), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW It is a scene where you are in a collision. In the scene of (i) of FIG. 33B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (h) of FIG. 33B, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “very thick”. ing. In addition, after the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW is changed as the display mode of "very thick", the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R become the reach aspect.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 34A and (g) to (j) in FIG. 34B are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In addition, in FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B, the arrow "画像" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is in motion. Moreover, FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B show the success production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP3 (it has change (a thickness) shown in (B) of FIG. It is assumed that "very heavy") is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B and the display operation example shown in FIG. 29A and FIG. The rest is the same, so different parts will be mainly described. Also, the explanation of the failure effect is omitted.

  In (a) of FIG. 34A, the active display AH (an active display obtained by moving the hold display corresponding to the variable display to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and it is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

  In (c) of FIG. 34, reach is established after variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 34A, and the decorative symbol of decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of decorative symbol display area 5R are reachable. It is a scene which is stopped and displayed in the mode. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 34A, the chance symbol described as “good opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5 by low-speed scroll, and in the scene of (e) of FIG. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 34A, all the decoration patterns temporarily stopped are variably displayed (re-variable display) again.

  Further, in (f) of FIG. 34A, an arrow Y2 in which the character of “superheat” is drawn is displayed at the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as a second system change effect. Here, (a) in FIG. 34A to (f) in FIG. 34A are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

  Then, in the scene of (g) in FIG. 34B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 34B (f), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (h) of FIG. 34B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (g) of FIG. 34B, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “very thick”. The decoration pattern of the decoration pattern display area 5L and the decoration pattern of the decoration pattern display area 5R are in a reach mode. Then, in the scene of (i) of FIG. 34B, after the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “very thick”, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R When the game is in the reach mode, the chance symbol is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the scene of (j) of FIG. 34B, the chance symbol does not temporarily stop in the decorative symbol display area 5C. The decorative pattern of the area 5L and the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern display area 5R are decided as the reach aspect.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 35A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 35B are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In addition, in FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B, the arrow "表示" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is in motion. Moreover, FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B show the success production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP3 (it has change (a thickness) shown in (B) of FIG. It is assumed that "very heavy") is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B is different from the display operation example shown in FIG. 34A and FIG. The rest is the same, so different parts will be mainly described. Also, the explanation of the failure effect is omitted.

  In (a) of FIG. 35A, an active display AH (an active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and it is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

  (C) of FIG. 35A is an arrow Y2 in which the character of “superheat” is drawn on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as a second system change presentation after variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. Is displayed. Here, (a) in FIG. 35A to (c) in FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. Then, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 35A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. Then, in the scene of FIG. 35A (e), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “very thick”, and the decorative symbol display area 5L The decorative symbol and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are scenes being stopped and displayed in a display manner different from the reach manner.

  In the scene of (f) of FIG. 35A, the chance symbol described as “good opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C appears on the image display device 5 by low speed scroll, and the chance symbol is decorative in the scene of (g) of FIG. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 35B, all decoration patterns temporarily stopped are variably displayed (re-variable display) again. Then, in the scene of (i) in FIG. 35B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach form.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 36A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 36B are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In addition, in FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B, the arrow "画像" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is in motion. Moreover, FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B show the success production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP3 (it has a change (a thickness) shown in (B) of FIG. It is assumed that "very heavy") is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B is different from the display operation example shown in FIG. 35A and FIG. The rest is the same, so different parts will be mainly described. Also, the explanation of the failure effect is omitted.

  In (a) of FIG. 36A, when the active display area AHA is activated (when the variable display is started, the active display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and it is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

  (C) of FIG. 36A is an arrow Y2 in which the character of “superheat” is drawn on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change presentation after variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. Is displayed. Here, (a) in FIG. 35A to (c) in FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. Then, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 36A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. Then, in the scene of FIG. 36A (e), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “very thick”, and the decorative symbol display area 5L The decorative symbol and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are scenes displayed in a stop manner in the reach mode.

  In the scene of (f) of FIG. 36A, the chance symbol described as “good opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C appears on the image display device 5 by low-speed scroll, and the chance symbol is decorative in the scene of (g) of FIG. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (h) in FIG. 36B, all the decoration patterns temporarily stopped are variably displayed (re-variable display) again. Then, in the scene of (i) in FIG. 36B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach mode.

  Here, in FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B, a scene example in which the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in reach mode is shown in FIG. 36A (e) and 36B (i). However, as shown in FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B, in the case where pseudo continuous change occurs after the reach is established, “timing 3” in FIG. 28 is treated as the timing in FIG. 36B (i). In other words, reach establishment in FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B means that the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed as the reach form in FIG. It is the scene of i).

  In FIG. 29 to FIG. 36, the success effect may be executed at the timing when the active display change effect (first system change effect, second system change effect, first system change effect and second system change effect) is executed. The degree of expectation is different. For example, when there is an active display change effect performed at a first timing and an active display change effect performed at a second timing later than the first timing in the variation, the change is performed at the second timing. This means that there is a high degree of expectation that the successful presentation in the active display change presentation can be performed.

  (Modification) The display mode of the hold display does not have to be the display mode representing the degree of expectation for the big hit shown in FIG. 24, and may be the normal mode and the normal mode which are the normal (default and initial color) display modes. May include different special aspects and first special aspects and second special aspects which are aspects different from the normal aspect and the special aspects. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 37, 38 and 39.

  For example, instead of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 24, another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 may be used. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing another setting example of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display. The ROM 121 may store seven types of pending display mode determination tables according to the change category. FIG. 37 (A) shows the pending display mode selected when the variation category "PA1 (shortened / not reached lost)" or the variation category "PA2 (not reached (missed))" among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by a determination table. FIG. 37 (B) is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 37C shows the setting of the display rate determination ratio of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (loss))” among the seven types described above. An example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 37D is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (loss))” among the above seven types. 37E shows the display of the pending display by the pending display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above-mentioned seven types. Fig. 37F is a setting example (H-TBL5) of the determination ratio of the aspect, and Fig. 37F is a suspension selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the seven types described above. Fig. 37 (G) is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the display mode determination table Fig. 37 (G) shows a variation category "PB5 (Super Lee) among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by the pending | holding display mode determination table selected when it is (beta) (big hit).

  When FIG. 37 and FIG. 24 are compared, a point that a part of the determination ratio to “white” in each pending display mode determination table in FIG. 24 is allocated to “gray” in FIG. 37 is different. Specifically, the determination ratio for “white” in each suspension display mode determination table is 4: 1 for the “white” determination ratio and “grey” for each suspension display mode determination table in FIG. 37. This is an example of setting in which the determination ratio is assigned. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of a normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. In the special mode, the ratio of executing the active display change effect to change the display mode of the active display is the same as the normal mode and the expectation for the big hit, but when the “gray” suspended display becomes the active display, It is a display mode showing high.

  In the setting example, unlike the normal aspect and the special aspect, the first special aspect blue, which is different from the normal aspect and the expectation for the big hit (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the normal aspect and the special aspect) Unlike the special aspect, the second special aspect yellow which is different in the expectation for the big hit (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the first special aspect), and unlike the normal aspect and the special aspect, the expectation for the big hit A third special aspect such as red, etc., may also be included which are different (for example, the expectation for a big hit is higher than the second special aspect).

  For example, in the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 determines the plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 37 based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main substrate 11. From the table, select the hold display mode determination table to be used, and based on the selected hold display mode decision table and the display mode decision random number value MR6 for the hold display, additionally display in the first start winning combination display area 5HL What is necessary is just to determine the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the pending | holding display to be made.

  Then, after executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). . Specifically, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control first displays the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process, the first corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The determination content (the display mode at the time of addition) of the first holding effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  Then, after executing the process of S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (S160) (the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A) Adding a new hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of Pending addition processing is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning storage display area 5HL to display a hold display according to the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described first read advance notice buffer 194C. The first hold effect is set by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the set effect control pattern, to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc., while setting the control pattern as the use pattern. A hold display according to the addition display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL.

  Then, in the process of S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 25, the process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change presentation to the active display corresponding to the change, or to execute the active display change presentation, A process of determining whether to execute a display change effect, and in the case of an active display (fluctuation) to execute the active display change effect, a process of determining a presentation mode of the active display change effect to be executed, or active in the fluctuation A process of determining the timing of executing the display change presentation, and a process of setting (or resetting) the presentation control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change presentation are executed.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect with respect to the active display corresponding to the change, and a process of determining which active display change effect is to be performed when executing the active display change effect Do. When using the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display shown in FIG. 37, the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 may be used instead of the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. . Here, the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. Depending on whether the display mode of the display is a special mode, the point of referring to the setting example of the determination ratio by another active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table differs.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing another setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 38A shows a setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode (gray) FIG. 38B is a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is the special mode (gray). In each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B, whether or not to execute the active display change effect as in the setting example shown in FIG. 26, or when performing the active display change effect It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect of active display change production | presentation. Each setting example shown in FIG. 38 (A) and FIG. 38 (B) is compared with the random number MR7 (not shown) for determination of execution presence / absence of active display change presentation in the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table. Numerical values (decision values) are assigned to the "execution" and "no execution" at the determination rates as shown in FIG. 38 (A) and FIG. 38 (B), respectively. Further, in “active” of the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination is “first system The determination as shown in each of FIGS. 38A and 38B in each of “change presentation”, “second system change presentation”, and “first system change presentation and second system change presentation” Allocated in proportions.

  In addition, "execution yes" "first system change production" indicates that the first system change production is performed as an active display change presentation, "execution yes" "second system change presentation" is the second system change production "Execute" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" represent the effect of performing as an active display change effect, and the active display change is a change effect of both the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect. Indicates that the effect is to be made. Also, "execution not performed" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, fluctuation pattern 1-X represents fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2 and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 illustrated in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, and PA4-3 illustrated in FIG. It represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 38, when the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (variable display pattern) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PA1-X or PA2-X, "not executed" is 100. %, Indicating that neither the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. Moreover, when performing an active display change presentation (in the case of "execution" in FIG. 38 (A) and FIG. 38 (B)), when it becomes hot reach (for example, super reach), reach not hot (for example, normal reach) Compared to when it becomes), the rate at which the first system change effect is executed is higher than the second system change effect. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is a "big hit", the rate at which the first system change effect is performed is higher than that at the time when the "losing" occurs, rather than the second system change effect. In addition, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), compared with the time when it is not a hot reach (for example, normal reach), a ratio in which both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are performed is high. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit", the ratio in which both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are performed is higher than when the change pattern is "loss".

  In addition, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the change is a special mode, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the active display change effect is different, and in the case where the active display corresponding to the change is a special mode, the change As compared with the case where the active display corresponding to is not a special mode, the determination ratio at which the active display change presentation is performed is high. Further, in the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 26 is not considered and in the case where the active display corresponding to the variation is not the special mode in consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. If the active display corresponding to the change is a special mode in consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 38, the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. The determination ratio at which the active display change presentation is performed is high in the order of the determination ratio by the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the determination ratio by the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the CPU 120 for effect control changes the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random value MR7 for the active display change execution execution presence / absence determination, and the corresponding specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect by the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display), and when performing the active display change effect, among the effect mode of the plurality of active display change effect Decide which active display change presentation is to be performed.

  In addition, CPU120 for production control first decides execution presence or absence of active indication change production, when it decides with “execution yes” “first system change presentation” or “second system change presentation” or “first system change presentation” And “the second system change effect” may be determined.

  Note that the figure group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined such that the expectation for the big hit changes depending on the combination of the figures forming the figure group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio by the first system detailed pattern determination table at the time of the first system change presentation execution. In each setting example shown in FIG. 39, the first system detailed pattern determination table for the first system change effect includes, for example, 10 types of first system detailed patterns SHP1 corresponding to combinations of three figures of triangle, pentagon, and star. SHP 10 is included. When only the first system change effect is executed (when any one of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 27A is determined), the first system detailed pattern is selected. It is referred to when performing both of the second system change rendition (when any of the active display change rendition patterns AP1 to AP12 of FIG. 27C is determined).

  In this first system detailed pattern, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detailed pattern is determined by the active display change effect pattern as shown in FIG. It is assigned.

  In addition, it is assumed that the first system detailed pattern as the effect mode of the 10 types of first system change effects according to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the ROM 121.

  In FIG. 39, the first system detailed pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when all the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are configured by triangles. According to the illustrated example, when the AP1 to AP3 and BP1 are determined to be non-hot reach (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 27, the determination ratio is high and when they are non-hot reach (for example, normal reach) The determination rate determined in the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher than when it is a hot reach (for example, a super reach). Further, the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is determined according to the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 27, and the first system details which can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined change. The pattern is determined.

  Similarly, the first system detailed pattern "SHP2" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a pentagon, triangle or triangle, and the first system detail pattern "SHP3" is a figure The effect pattern when the three figures forming the group Y1 are composed of pentagons, pentagons and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP4" is a pentagon, pentagon and pentagon of three figures forming the figure group Y1. The first system detailed pattern "SHP5" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a triangle, and a triangle, the first system detailed pattern "SHP5". The detail pattern “SHP6” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a pentagon, and a triangle, and the first system detail pattern “SH 7 is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a pentagon, and a pentagon, and in the first system detailed pattern "SHP8", the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are It is an effect pattern when it is composed of stars, stars, triangles, triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP9" is an effect when the three figures constituting figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, pentagons The first system detailed pattern “SHP10” is a pattern, and is an effect pattern when all of the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars. According to the illustrated example, the degree of expectation with which the successful effect can be performed is different depending on the combination of the figures forming the figure group Y1.

  In addition, when performing an active display change production | presentation with respect to the active display corresponding to the pending | holding display displayed in a special aspect, when considering a special aspect, as shown to FIG. 37, FIG. In addition, it may be executed as a suggestion effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect, and a suggestion effect that suggests an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the pending display displayed in the special mode (for example, a success effect and a failure effect , And may be performed in the same or a different manner. In the case where the special mode is taken into consideration as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H is a special mode. In some cases, a pending change presentation may be performed on the pending display displayed in the special mode in the same or different presentation mode as the active presentation change presentation.

  In FIG. 39, among the group of figures Y1 initially configured (displayed in combination), the figure to be deleted in the common effect may be deleted from the figure that is the display mode of the active display with a low degree of expectation. For example, when the first system detailed pattern SHP6 is determined as the success effect, a display mode after the success effect is executed in a group of figures composed of three figures of "star", "pentagon" and "triangle". Of the two figures other than the figure (eg, “pentagon”), the figure with the low degree of expectation (eg, “triangle”) is erased first, and then the figure with the low degree of expectation (eg, “star”) is erased. If it is a failure effect, erase in the order of "triangle", "pentagon" and "star" out of a group of figures consisting of "star", "pentagon" and "triangle". It is also good.

  FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the display mode change effect and the presence or absence of the display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. FIG. 40 (A) shows an example in which the display mode change is performed after the display mode change effect is performed on the pending display or the active display. FIG. 40 (B) shows an example in which the display mode change is not performed after the display mode change effect is performed on the pending display or the active display.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B), as the display mode change effect that suggests that the display mode changes for the pending display or the active display, the display mode for the pending display or the active display to be targeted is Similar effects are performed regardless of whether they actually change. When “no change” is selected as the change effect mode as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M), as shown in FIG. 40 (B), the pending display or the active display is targeted. After the display mode change effect is performed, the change of the hold display or the active display is not performed. On the other hand, when "Aptitude" display or "Heating fever" display, "2 people" display or "3 people" display is selected as the change effect mode as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M). As shown in FIG. 40A, after the display mode change effect directed to the hold display or the active display is performed, the change of the hold display or the active display is performed. As described above, the execution of the display mode change presentation of the hold display or the active display is different from the execution of the change of the hold display or the active display.

  Next, a character icon selection table in which data for selecting a character icon used as a first specific display mode of hold display or active display is set, and a character used as a second specific display mode of hold display or active display A character icon selection table in which data for selecting an icon is set will be described. These tables are stored in the RAM 122.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. FIG. 41 (A) shows a character icon selection table, and FIG. 41 (B) shows a character selection table.

  In the character icon selection table of FIG. 41 (A), a character icon composed of the characters “Caution” of the normal display mode selected as the display when the hold display appears and the effect selection of FIGS. 26 (F) to (I) The second change at the time of the display mode change effect by the character icon consisting of the character of "a chance" which can be selected as the first change display at the time of the display mode change effect by the table and the effect selection table of FIG. A character icon consisting of characters of "superheat" that can be selected as a display is set to be selectable. The expectation to the jackpot of these character icons has a relation of “attention” <“good opportunity” <“superheat”.

  In the character icon selection table of FIG. 41 (B), the character icon of “one person” in the normal display mode selected as the display at the time of appearance of the hold display and the effect selection table of FIGS. 26 (J) to (M) It can be selected as the second change display at the time of the display mode change effect by the character icon of "two people" which can be selected as the first change display at the time of the display mode change effect and the effect selection table of FIGS. The "3 people" character icon is set to be selectable. The degree of expectation to the jackpot for these character icons has a relationship of “1” <“2” <“3”.

  Next, a change effect pattern table in which data for selecting one of the above-described first to fourth change effect effects is selected will be described. The change presentation pattern table is stored in the RAM 122.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a change presentation pattern table. In the change effect pattern table, according to the types of the first change effect to the fourth change effect, the effect pattern when the change effect is selected during the hold display, and the selection to perform the change effect during the active display The effect pattern of the time is shown. Each of the selection to perform the change effect during the hold display and the selection to perform the change effect during the active display is performed using the data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) to (E).

  For the first change effect, when it is selected to be on hold display, the effect pattern (see FIG. 43) in which the blue arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display of the character icon of the effect target is selected Is executed. When it is selected for the first change effect during active display, the effect of the effect pattern in which the blue arrow acts in the lateral direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon for the effect target .

  With regard to the second change effect, when it is selected to be on hold display, the effect of the effect pattern in which the red arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display of the character icon of the effect target is selected and executed . With regard to the second change effect, when it is selected during active display, the effect of the effect pattern in which the red arrow acts in the lateral direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon for effect .

  With regard to the third change effect, when it is selected to be on hold display, the effect of the effect pattern in which the blue arrow acts downward to the hold display of the character icon of the effect target is selected and executed . With regard to the third change effect, when it is selected during active display, the effect of the effect pattern in which the blue arrow acts in the lateral direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon of the effect target .

  With regard to the fourth change effect, when it is selected to be on hold display, the effect of the effect pattern in which the red arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display of the character icon of the effect target is selected and executed . With regard to the fourth change effect, when it is selected to be displayed during active display, the effect of the effect pattern in which the red arrow acts in the lateral direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon for effect .

  Next, an example of effect display when the character icon is displayed as the hold display will be described. FIG. 43 is a display screen view showing an example of effect display when the character icon 61 is displayed on the image display device 5 as hold display.

  In the case where the hold display mode by the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 24 when a new first hold storage occurs, as shown in FIG. 43 (A) first A display is made to cause the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL to appear on hold display by the character icon 61 indicating "attention" display which is a normal display mode.

  The timing of the change effect is selected and determined as “on hold display” by the character hold display time change effect timing selection table of FIG. 26B, and the change effect type by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 43B is selected and determined to be “first change effect”, FIG. 43B is displayed during the hold display after the first hold shift after the hold display by the character icon 61 displaying the “attention” appears. As shown, as the display mode change effect, a first change effect is performed in which the blue arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display by the character icon 61 indicating the "attention" display.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (C), when the display after the first change effect is selected and determined to be the “extensive heat” display by the first change effect pending display changing selection table of FIG. 26 (F). After execution of the display mode change effect by the change effect, the hold display by the character icon 61 is changed from the "attention" display to the "superheat" display in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL. As described above, when the holding display by the character icon 61 changes, the player's expectation for the jackpot regarding the holding display can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an example of effect display when the character icon is displayed as the active display after the hold display will be described. FIG. 44 is a display screen view showing an example of effect presentation of the active display after the character icon 62 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the hold display.

  When a new first hold storage occurs, if the hold display mode by the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 24, first, as shown in FIG. A display for causing the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL to appear on hold display by the character icon 62 indicating the "one person" display which is a normal display mode is displayed. In the state of FIG. 44 (A), after the pending display by the character icon 62 “1 person” display appears and appears, the previous pending display is digested and “1” is displayed as the pending display for the next variable display. A state is shown in which a hold display by the character icon 62 "person display" is displayed.

  Then, the timing of the change effect is selected and determined as "actively displayed" by the character hold display time change effect timing selection table of FIG. 26C, and is changed by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. When the effect type is selected and determined to be the “fourth change effect”, the active display corresponding to the hold display by the character icon 62 displayed as “one person” as shown in FIG. 44 (B) is the active display area In AHA, it is performed by the character icon 62 of “one person” display, and as shown in FIG. 44 (B), as a display mode change effect, the red arrow is horizontal to the active display by the character icon 62 of “one person” display. A fourth change effect acting from the direction is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), when the display after the third change presentation is selected and determined to be “3 persons” display by the fourth change presentation active display change selection table of FIG. 26 (M), After the execution of the change effect by the fourth change effect, in the active display area AHA, the hold display by the character icon 62 is changed from “one person” display to “three person” display. As described above, when the active display by the character icon 62 changes, the player's expectation for the jackpot of the current variable display can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, an iconic effect included in the effect execution setting process (S532) for setting effects when performing a hold display by the character icon and the character icon using the various data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) to (M) The setting process will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing icon effect setting processing. The processing for setting the execution of the above-described effect execution (S532) is performed for the processing for setting the presentation when performing the hold display or the active display by the character icon and the character icon using the various data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) to (M). In the example of FIG. 45, in order to clarify the flow of setting of presentation when holding display or active display by the character icon and the character icon, the specific process of the icon presentation setting process is performed. The processing content will be described.

  In the table of FIG. 24, when the hold display mode of the character icon or the character icon is selected and determined, the icon effect setting process is executed. In the icon effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the following process. First, random number value MR10 is extracted, and a change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C) is used according to the character icon or character icon pending display mode selected in the table of FIG. Then, one of “pending display” and “active display” is selected and determined as the execution timing of the display mode change effect (S700).

  Next, the random value MR11 is extracted, and the change shown in FIG. 26 (D) or FIG. 26 (E) according to the change presentation execution timing of “pending display” or “active display” selected and determined in S700. Using the effect type selection table, for "display pending", select and determine "first change effect" or "second change effect", and for "active display", select "third change effect" or "third change effect" The fourth change presentation is selected and decided (S701).

  Next, in S701, it is determined whether "first change effect" is selected and determined (S702). When it is determined in S702 that the "first change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined in S700 whether or not the "pending display" is selected and determined (S703). When it is determined in S703 that "hold display" is selected and determined, the random value MR12 is extracted to execute the first change effect during the hold display, and the first change effect hold of FIG. 26 (F) is held. According to the display result (big hit, lost) using the change selection table during display, any one of the "no change", "appropriate" display, and "superheat" display, the display change mode after the first change effect Is selected and determined (S704), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S703 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), random number value MR12 is used to execute the first change presentation during active display. The first change effect active display in FIG. 26 (G) using the change selection table, according to the display result (big hit, lost), "no change", "appropriate" display, "super heat" display One of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the first change presentation (S705), and the process is ended.

  If it is determined in S701 that "first change effect" is not selected and determined in S701, it is determined whether or not "second change effect" is selected and determined in S701 (S706). If it is determined in S706 that the "second change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined in S700 whether or not the "pending display" is selected and determined (S707).

  When it is determined in S707 that "hold display" is selected and determined, the random value MR12 is extracted to execute the second change presentation during the hold display, and the second change presentation hold of FIG. According to the display result (big hit, lost) using the change selection table during display, any one of the "no change", "appropriate" display, and "superheat" display, the display change mode after the second change effect It selects and decides as (S708), and ends processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S707 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random value MR12 is set to perform the second change presentation during active display. Of the second change production active display in FIG. 26 (I), and according to the display result (big hit, lost), “no change”, “appropriate” display, “super heat” display One of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the second change presentation (S709), and the process is ended.

  When it is determined in S706 that "second change effect" is not selected and determined, it is determined in S701 whether or not "third change effect" is selected and determined (S710). If it is determined in S710 that the "third change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined in S700 whether or not "pending display" is selected and determined (S711). When it is determined in S711 that “pending display” is selected and determined, the random value MR12 is extracted to execute the third change presentation during the suspension display, and the third change presentation pending in FIG. 26 (J) According to the display result (big hit, lost) using the change selection table during display, either “No change”, “2 people” display, “3 people” display, display change after the third change effect The mode is selected and determined (S712), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S711 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random value MR12 is selected to execute the third change effect during active display. Using the change selection table in the third change effect active display of FIG. 26 (K), and according to the display result (big hit, lost), "No change", "2 people" display, "3 people" display Any one of the above is selected and determined as the display change mode after the third change effect (S713), and the process is ended.

  If it is determined in S701 that "third change effect" is not selected and determined in S701, it is determined whether or not "fourth change effect" is selected and determined in S701 (S714). When it is determined in S714 that the "fourth change effect" is selected and determined, it is determined in S700 whether or not the "pending display" is selected and determined (S715). When it is determined in S715 that "hold display" is selected and determined, the random value MR12 is extracted to execute the fourth change effect during the hold display, and the fourth change effect hold of FIG. 26 (L) is held. According to the display result (big hit, lost) using the change selection table during display, either “No change”, “2 people” display, “3 people” display, display change after the fourth change effect The mode is selected and determined (S716), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S715 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random value MR12 is selected to execute the fourth change effect during active display. Using the change selection table in the fourth change effect active display of FIG. 26 (M), according to the display result (big hit, lost), “No change”, “2 people” display, “3 people” display Any of the above is selected and determined as the display change mode after the fourth change presentation (S717), and the process is ended.

  By the icon effect setting process described above, an effect using a character icon or a character icon is set, and a variable display effect process (S172) is executed based on the setting in the process, for example, as shown in FIG. Such a pending display mode change effect and a variation-responsive display mode change effect as shown in FIG. 44 are to be executed.

[Modification of display mode change effect by icon display]
Next, various modified examples of the effects of the active display as described above will be described.

  (A) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) to (M), FIG. 43, and FIG. 44, the total of one timing in the hold display and one timing in the active display is two. The example which made it possible to perform the display mode change presentation which changes the display mode of a character icon display or a character icon display at any one timing among four timings was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 46, the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display may be selectable from a plurality of timings.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of an effect of selecting the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display from a plurality of timings. FIG. 46 (A) shows a first start winning combination memory display area 5HL and an active display area AHA for explaining the timing of the display mode change effect. FIG. 46 (B) shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 26 (B). FIG. 46C shows a modification of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 46 (A), in this modification, character icon display is performed at any one of three timings of two timings in the hold display and one timing in the active display, Alternatively, it is possible to execute a display mode change effect that changes the display mode of the character icon display. The two display mode change effect execution timings during the suspension display are, for example, the number "2" in the suspension display area to which the numbers "1" to "4" are attached in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL. When the hold display is shown in the display area where the hold display corresponding to the second oldest hold storage with a mark is displayed (during first hold display), the first oldest hold with a number of “1” There are two cases when the hold display is made in the display area where the hold display corresponding to the storage is made (during the second hold display).

  In this modification, as described above, the display mode change effect is executed at one selected timing from the three timings of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display. In this modification, when the hold display is performed by the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 46 (B). In the table of FIG. 46 (B), as in the table of FIG. 26 (B), the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is set to be lower than during the hold display during active display. On the other hand, in this modification, when the hold display is performed by the character icon display, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 46 (C). In the table of FIG. 46 (C), as in the table of FIG. 26 (C), the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is set to be lower than that during active display. By such setting, in this modification, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Furthermore, this makes the effect more varied, and can further improve the enjoyment of the effect.

  Further, when the hold display is performed by the character icon display, the selection ratio is set higher as the hold display area is closer to the hold display area where the hold display appears. As a result, when the hold display is performed by the character icon display, when the display mode change effect is executed at the timing during the first hold display and when the display mode change is performed at the timing during the second hold display The selection ratio of “no change”, “appropriate” display, “superheat” display may be made different (for example, the higher the selection ratio is, the lower the selection ratio of “superheat” display).

  In this modification, for example, a part (two) of the four reserved display areas is targeted, and an example in which the display mode change effect can be executed during the reserved display has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be made executable during the hold display for all the hold display areas. Moreover, about active display, the period when execution of active display is continued is divided into a plurality of periods, and each of these plurality of periods is made into a period when display mode change production becomes executable, and any period is displayed mode change It may be selectable as a period for executing the effect. In this way, the rendition becomes more varied, and the interest of the rendition can be further improved.

  The timing at which the display mode change effect is executed includes the timings described in the embodiment and the modification described above, and among the plurality of timings during the suspension display period and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the target suspension storage, Any timing may be set as long as it is executed at any timing.

  (B) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 41 etc., when the hold display is made by the character icon, an example is shown in which the display form of the character icon changes due to the display mode change effect. When the icon is displayed, an example is shown in which the display mode of the character icon changes due to the display mode change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is made by the character icon, the character icon is a character icon by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio. You may make an effect that changes to another icon. In addition, when the hold display is made by the character icon, the effect of changing the character icon to another icon such as a character icon may be performed at a predetermined rate by the display mode change effect. If such an effect is given, the player can be made to pay attention that a change in the display mode of the specific display (the display mode of the icon) or a change in the type of the specific display (type of the icon) occurs. Interest can be further improved.

  In this modification, an icon display that can be displayed at the appearance of the hold display, such as a character icon and a character icon, may be used as the icon after the change, for example, and is not displayed at the appearance of the hold display. Specific icon displays may be used.

  (C) Active display change effects (success effects) and active display change noise effects (failure effects) as described in FIGS. 27 to 36B and the like are displayed via display mode change effects as described in FIGS. 40 to 46. May be applied to the active display. Specifically, after the start of the active display in the icon shape as described above, in the first system change effect as described above, the effect until before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display, or the second system change effect The effect until arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display is executed.

  After that, a successful presentation or a failure presentation is performed. As the successful presentation, in the first systematic change presentation, a presentation in which the graphic of any of the shapes “star” of the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display to change to “a display mode in which the icon display wears the crown of the star”. In the second system change effect, an effect in which the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame to change the thickness of the line of the active display frame, both of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are active and active The effect of changing the display mode such as display, active display frame, etc. is executed.

  On the other hand, as a failure effect, in the first system change effect, an effect that disappears before the figure of the shape "star" of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and the display mode of the active display does not change, the second In the systematic change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the effect that the thickness of the line of the active display frame is not changed, both the first system change effect and the second system change effect It is performed and the effect etc. which do not change the display mode of one or both of an active display or an active display frame are performed.

  That is, a common effect (common effect) is performed when the aspect of the active display is changed and not changed. In this case, as described above, of the plurality of timings during the variable display, control is performed so that the ratio of executing the success effect differs depending on at which timing the common effect is to be performed.

  As described above, after the active display to be displayed through the display mode change effect described above is performed, the display is performed when the active display change effect (success effect) or the like as described in FIGS. The expectation for the big hit may be higher than when such an active display change presentation or the like is not performed after the active display to be displayed after the aspect change presentation is performed.

  (D) In the embodiment described above, an example has been shown in which display mode change effects such as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 can be executed in any period of pending display and active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executable at both timings of the pending display and the active display.

  (E) In the embodiment described above, an example has been shown in which display mode change effects as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 can be executed at any one time during the hold display period and the active display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be performed stepwise at a plurality of times during the hold display period and the active display period. In such a case, for example, the change mode of the icon display may be divided into a plurality of stages and may be selected, and the icon display may be selected and set to be able to change stepwise in a plurality of timings.

  (F) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the pending display or the active display to be the target of the display mode change presentation as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 is displayed in an icon shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending display or the active display to be the target of the display mode change effect may be a display mode different from the display mode (for example, "sphere") of the normal display, and is not limited to the icon shape. . Therefore, even if it is a sphere, the display mode different from the display mode such as the shape and color obtained by the normal display (for example, the size is different) And so on)).

  (G) If there are multiple types of pending display or active display (for example, the types of icon display selected at the time of pending appearance display) to be displayed for display mode change effects as shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. Among the plurality of timings during the display period and the active display period, the pending display period may include a type in which the display mode change effect is not executed at all, and the display mode change effect is executed at all during the active display period May not include the type.

  (H) In the embodiment described above, with regard to the hold display subject to execution of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46, the hold display as shown in FIG. Although an example is shown in which only the display mode at the appearance display is selected and determined, such a start winning game (at the time of holding storage) indicates that the hold display or the active display as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to (M). A final display mode (no change, “good opportunity”, “excessive heat”, “two people”, “three people”, etc.) after the pending display mode change production in may be selected and determined.

  (I) In the embodiment described above, the display mode of the hold display to be subjected to the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 is a character icon as shown in FIG. 24, or Although the character icon is determined, the color of the character icon and the color of the character icon may be selected and determined as in the above-described "sphere". That is, the display mode of the hold display which is the execution target of the display mode change effect may be set such that the combination of the shape of the icon and the color of the icon can be selected and determined. Then, even for the same icon, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be set differently depending on the selected color.

  (J) The display mode change effect of the icon display described above may be executed on condition that the number of held items is a predetermined number such as 3 or 4 or more.

  (K) The icon display in the pending display and the icon display in the active display do not have to be completely the same icon display. For example, the icon display in the hold display is displayed in a first color such as white, while the icon display in the active display is displayed in a second color such as black, etc. The display mode with the icon display during active display may be partially different. In addition, with regard to character icons, the characters of the icon in the hold display are displayed in the Mincho style, the characters of the icon in the active display are displayed in the block body, etc. . Further, with regard to the character icon, the icon in the hold display is displayed as a male character, the icon in an active display is displayed as a female character, etc. The number of persons may be the same but gender may be different.

  (L) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the hold display and the active display are displayed by the same display means (image display device 5), but the present invention is not limited to this. Display means having different hold display and active display (For example, the hold display may be displayed on the first image display device, and the active display may be displayed on the second image display device).

  (M) In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which the hold display and the active display are displayed using different display areas, but the present invention is not limited to this, and switching display may be performed using the same display area. It is preferable (for example, a display in which the active display area is not displayed when the hold display is displayed, and a display in which the hold display area is not displayed when the active display is performed).

  (N) In the embodiment described above, the effect mode (type) of the display mode change effect may be different depending on the display mode (character icon, character icon) of the icon display. For example, a dedicated display mode change effect corresponding to the display mode (render mode) of the icon display may be provided to execute the effect.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), when the hold display is in the display mode of the character icon, the hold display is in comparison with the display mode of the character icon. The rate at which the display mode change effect is performed is higher than during active display. On the other hand, when the display mode of the character icon is displayed, the rate at which the display mode change effect is performed is higher in the active display than in the held display, as compared with the display mode of the character icon. Thereby, the player is made to pay attention to the display type (for example, display type such as a character icon or character icon) of the change target of the display mode change effect and the timing of the display mode change (for example, timings during hold display and active display) It is possible to improve the interest of the game for the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

  (2) With regard to the display of character icons and the display of character icons, as shown in FIGS. 26F to 26M, the ratio at which the display mode actually changes after execution of the display mode change effect is pending display. And equal to active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, compared to the display mode of the character icon, the rate at which the display mode change effect is executed is higher in the hold display than in the active display, When it is a display mode of the character icon, compared to when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, it is based on the fact that the display mode change effect is performed more frequently in the active display than in the hold display. The frequency at which the display mode of the icon changes varies between the pending display and the active display depending on whether the pending display is displayed as the character icon display or the display of the character icon, and the pending display is different. The rate at which the display mode is to be changed is different at the time of active display. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the type of display of the change target and the timing of the display mode change for the change of the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the display mode change of the active display. Can improve the interest of the game about the change of

  (3) As described above, the common effect performed in common when changing the mode of the active display and when not changing the variable display, and the mode of the active display after the common effect is performed It is possible to execute a success effect to be changed or a failure effect not to change the mode, and among a plurality of timings during execution of the variable display, a ratio for executing the success effect depending on which timing the common effect is to be executed is Because they are different, it is possible to pay attention to the execution timing of the common effect. Also, by giving attention to the execution timing of the common effect, the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

  (4) As a modification of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is made by the character icon, the character icon changes to another icon such as the character icon by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio Although the effect to be displayed and the effect that the character icon changes to another icon such as a character icon by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio when the on-hold display is made by the character icon has been described, such effect If so, the player can be made to pay attention to a change in the display mode of the specific display (the display mode of the icon) or a change in the type of the specific display (type of the icon), thereby further improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 26 (F) to (I), etc., the display of “favorable heat or intense heat (with change)” is displayed for the first change effect (blue effect) and the second change effect (red effect). By changing the ratio of being played, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change mode during the hold display or the active display for the icon display, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Also, as shown in FIGS. 26 (J) to (M) etc., the display of “2 or 3 people (with change)” is displayed for the third change effect (blue effect) and the fourth change effect (red effect). By changing the ratio of being played, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change mode during the hold display or the active display for the icon display, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  (6) As for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is lower than that in the hold display during active display. F) As in (I), when the jackpot result is displayed, the level of the expectation of becoming a big hit is higher than that of the “opportunity” display, compared with the display being suspended during the active display, “superheat” display The rate at which the display mode change is selected is high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the aspect of the display aspect change of the icon display from the display type of the display aspect change target and the change timing to be selected. Also, as for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the rate at which the display mode change of the character icon is selected is lower than that during active display during the hold display. As shown in the) to (M), when the jackpot display results, the level of the expectation of becoming a big hit is higher than that of the "two" display, compared to the active display during the hold display, "three" display The rate at which the display mode change is selected is high. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the aspect of the display mode change of the icon display by the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment changes the display (e.g., special drawing) after the game medium passes through the starting area (e.g., the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) provided in the gaming area. The variable display of identification information is executed based on the establishment of the start condition that allows start of variable display of decorative pattern, variable display of decorative symbol, special display and variable display of decorative symbol etc. A gaming machine (e.g., a gaming machine) that controls to a specific gaming state (e.g., a big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol etc.) Hold storage means for storing hold information up to a predetermined upper limit for variable display of identification information in which gaming media have passed through the start area but variable display start conditions are not satisfied For example, Figure hold storage unit 151A, second special view hold storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and hold information stored in the hold storage unit Hold display means (for example, processing of adding a hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the first hold addition process of S162, and a second hold addition of S165) Processing including the addition of the suspension display to the second start winning storage display area 5HR etc.) and the display at the time of digestion corresponding to the suspension display corresponding to the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the variable display Special images representing information (for example, active display obtained by moving the hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA, For example, a special image or the like representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is provided in a predetermined area (for example, the active display area AHA, for example, in the lower center of the image display device 5. This active display area AHA Means a special image display means for displaying at least the active display AH, an area including a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH, and the active display frame AHW in addition to the active display AH) A common effect that is commonly performed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed during the variable display of identification information (for example, the first system change effect In the effects before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 Successive effects that change the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect, and the like (for example, in the first system change effect, graphic groups in the active display) In the effect that the figure of the shape "star" of Y1 collides and changes to the display mode of a star, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the thickness of the line of the active display frame Change the display mode of the special image or the effect of changing the display mode such as the active display or the active display frame by executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect Failure presentation not to cause (for example, in the first system change presentation, the figure of the shape “star” of one of the figure group Y1 disappears before the active indication collides with the active indication, and the table of the active indication The effect that the aspect does not change or the second system change effect, the effect that the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the thickness of the line of the active display frame does not change, the first of these And d) effect execution means capable of executing both the systematic change presentation and the second systematic change presentation and performing an effect such as not changing the display mode of one or both of the active display and the active display frame); Among the plurality of timings during the variable display, the ratio at which the success effect is performed differs depending on at which timing the common effect is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine pays attention to the execution timing of the common effect asking whether to change the display mode of the special image representing the information including the display at the time of digestion corresponding to the suspension display corresponding to the variable display. It can be done. In addition, the gaming machine can improve the player's sense of expectation by focusing attention on the execution timing.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect may be executed may include before and after the reach display mode constituting a part of the specific display result is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the player's sense of expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after the reach formation).

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the common effect is performed at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display than when it is performed at the first timing of the variable display of identification information being executed. The rate at which the success effect is performed may be higher in the case of being performed.

  According to such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be improved over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information in progress.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, a predetermining unit (for example, in the process of S412 by the CPU 103, the special view display result and the number of pending storages) which determine whether or not to set the specific display result before deriving the display result of the variable display And select the variation category determination table to be used from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 17, and select the variation category based on the selected variation category determination table and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. Determination processing, processing for determining a special map display result or jackpot type in the winning random number value determination processing of S220, and the like, and the suspension stored in the suspension storage unit before the determination of the predetermination unit Specific determination means to determine whether the display result of the variable display based on the information is the specific display result (for example, in the special symbol normal processing of S110 Processing to determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit", etc., before the variable display result is derived and displayed), and Whether or not the effect executing means capable of executing the on-hold notice effect that displays the on-hold display corresponding to the on-hold information as the determination target in any one of the plurality of types of display modes and whether the display mode on the on-hold display changes The display mode of the hold display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. The effect executing means includes a first special mode and a second special mode, wherein the effect executing means is a hold corresponding to the pending information determined by the specific determining means at different rates according to the determination result of the specific determining means. Display above (1) Display in the special mode or the second special mode, and it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings; The effect executing means may execute the suggestive effect at a frequency higher than that when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode when the hold display is displayed in the special mode.

  According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the suggestion effect, and therefore the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced.

  In the above description, although the active display change effect for the active display has been described, the pending change effect which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect is executed on the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H May be

  Also, as shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, for example, the execution ratio to execute the common effect described above as a suggestion effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect differs, for example, after the pending display is displayed in a special mode. May be high, and after the hold display is displayed in a special mode, a suggested effect that suggests an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, executed commonly for success effect and failure effect For example, it may be high, so that the percentage of execution of the suggestion effect suggesting the common effect in the same or different manner is different. When the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is a special mode, the active display change effect to the hold display displayed in the special mode and For example, it may be high, so that the execution rate at which the on-hold change presentation is performed in the same or different presentation manner is different.

  In the above description, main notice effects such as active display change effects are described, but when not affecting the main notice effects, notice effects such as other main notice effects and prefetch notice effects are executed with the same change. The main notice presentation may be performed with the same variation if it does not affect the notice presentation such as the other main notice presentation and the advance notice presentation. Here, when there is no influence, in the case of executing a plurality of advance notice effects (the main notice effect and the advance notice effect effect) in the change, the execution time for executing each notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change In this case, or in the case of executing a plurality of preliminary announcement effects (main advance announcement effects and pre-reading advance announcement effects) in the variation, the player is not easily seen by the presentation mode of each preliminary announcement effect.

  In the above description, although the active display change effect for the active display has been described, for example, a character having a hammer for the hold effect for the hold display appears and the operation effect for striking the first hold display with the hammer is executed. It is a decorative pattern when it is a presentation mode that changes the display mode of the hold display, or the decorative pattern is composed of a total of nine types of eight alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" and one character image. The effect mode may be such that the character pops out from the character image and the action effect is executed on the hold display of the target.

  In the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described, but it is determined whether or not the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode at the addition is changed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example by the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 37, and the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing at which the display mode of the suspension display is changed may be a predetermined timing such as the next change.

  In the above description, an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by a group of figures formed by a combination of plural figures as the first system change effect, and a display mode of the active display frame by the arrow as the second system change effect. Although the effect mode for changing is described, it may not be a figure or an arrow, and may be, for example, an effect mode for causing a character or the like to appear and changing a display mode of a special image including an active display or an active display frame.

  In the above description, the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the suspension display to be additionally displayed has been described as an example of white, but as in the setting example by the suspension display mode determination table as shown in FIGS. The display mode of the hold display is determined to be additionally displayed in, for example, four colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white, gray) The display mode of the hold display may be determined to be additionally displayed by the display mode of three or less colors or six or more colors, and the color of the hold display or the character or symbol drawn on the hold display may be added. The display mode of the hold display may be determined to be displayed, and the display mode of the hold display may be determined to be additionally displayed according to the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character type, etc.) Well, Viewing motion (e.g., the character of the operation patterns and the like in the hold display of character) may determine the hold display of the display mode to be added indicated by like.

  In the above description, the active display may be deleted from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative symbol, or even if the change of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped. Alternatively, the active display may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation.

  In the above description, after the common effect is performed on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the on-hold display corresponding to the variable display An example of executing a failure effect which does not change the display mode of the special image representing the information including the success effect which changes the time and the active display corresponding to the suspension display corresponding to the variable display has been described. The display mode of the success effect or the hold display for changing the display mode of the hold display after executing the common effect commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect for any of the hold displays displayed in the You may perform the failure production which does not change.

  In addition, after making a success effect or a failure effect for any of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and according to the hold display corresponding to the variable display A success rendition or a failure rendition may be further performed on the special image representing the information including the active display. In this case, for example, when there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, in each of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H in step 160 and step 163 in FIG. On the other hand, the presence or absence of a successful effect or failure effect for the pending display, the presentation mode, the execution timing for executing the presentation, the display mode of the pending display, etc. are determined according to the variation category, and the active display corresponding to each pending display As shown in FIG. 10, the presence or absence of execution of success rendering or failure rendering for the special image representing the information including the active display at the time of occurrence, presentation mode of the special display, etc. is determined according to the variation category etc. The determined contents may be stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C and the second notice buffer 194D.

  In the above description, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 on which the character of "superheat" is drawn is described as an example, but the character may not be drawn on the arrow Y2, and other characters May be drawn, or a character or the like may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect modes as the second system change effect, the success effect is selected depending on which of the plurality of types of second system change effects the effect mode of the second system change effect is selected. The degree of expectation to be implemented may be different. In addition, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests the display mode of the special image after the successful effect is performed depending on the effect mode of the second system change effect.

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above will be listed below.
(1) The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but various devices including the device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown by the flowchart, and the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 The rendering operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  (2) When the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, the hold change effect is executed on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. Well, if there is a hold display displayed in a special mode in any of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, any of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, or the active display Alternatively, the on-hold change presentation or the active display change presentation may be executed.

  (3) The first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect of changing the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, it is displayed on the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H like a first system change effect for changing the shape or a second system change effect for changing the thickness of the line of the active display frame. The display mode of the active display so as to be the display mode of a color with a high expectation of the big hit (for example, a color such as yellow or red in the case of the hold display displayed in blue) compared to the color of the hold display You can change the color in

  (4) Depending on the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA, for example, for each color of the active display, FIG. 27 (C) may be used as a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode set, and the success effect on the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA The setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode set so that the determination ratio of the display mode of the active display such as the color of the active display after it is set may be used may be used.

  (5) For example, as shown in FIG. 26, for example, "Performed with active" and "Performed with active" display change effect of variation pattern "PA4-X" in setting example of determination ratio by active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table , 45% (the sum of the first system change effect 15%, the second system change effect 10%, the sum of the first system change effect and the second system change effect 20%) vs. 55% The ratio may be set to “each” and “probable” and “do not perform” as in the variation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. The ratio according to the embodiment may be set such that any one of the plurality is set as 0%.

  (6) In the probability change control, a gaming machine may be provided in which a specific area is provided in advance in the special winning opening, and controlled to a probability change state based on passage of the gaming ball through the specific area. For example, based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the game ball enters a specific area in the big winning opening by being assigned to multiple types of big hit types such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability" It may be a gaming machine which is controlled to be in the easy gaming state and is controlled to be in the positive changing state based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific area.

  (7) In addition to the above, the apparatus configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 are described in the present invention. It is possible to change and modify arbitrarily within the scope of the present invention.

  (8) Using the frequency which is the gaming value of the size specified by the recorded information of the game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in the game is given and given. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a gaming ball enclosed in a gaming machine into a gaming area using a gaming score or a gaming score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided to perform variable display of plural types of identification information that can be identified respectively, and to display the display result. It is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a specific display result defined in advance is displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine The game is performed by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area into the game area, and the game score is subtracted in accordance with the hit of the game ball, and the game is played according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that add points. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the size of a game value usable for addition of game scores is recorded, and a game recording The game recording medium processing means may read out the record information recorded in the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion slot.

  (9) In the above description, when the fluctuation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (the effect control CPU 120) of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) does not reach the reach before reaching the reach (such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect in the first command) Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop to the second command, and after reaching reach (such as reach type and presence / absence of re-lottery effect) May transmit a command indicating a variation time or a variation mode) after so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  (10) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided by the removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but It may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  (11) Also, the execution form of the game is not limited to one executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but also temporarily storing in the internal memory etc. the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. It may be executed directly, using hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  (12) Although the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is illustrated in the above embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100% Among them, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value excluding 0% and 100% may be used.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, after the variation display result is derived and displayed as the probability variation big hit, after the end of the big hit gaming state, showed the example of the probability variation state control unconditionally controlled to the probability variation state. However, not limited to this, the probability variation determination device is controlled to be a probability variation state when it is detected by the detection means that the game ball has passed the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 A type of probability change state control may be performed.

  (14) It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 151A 1st special view reserve storage unit, 151B 2nd special view reserve storage unit, 194A 1st start winning reception command buffer, 194B 2nd start winning reception command buffer, 5 image display device, 102 RAM , 5HL first start winning storage display area, 5HR second starting winning storage display area, 120 effect control CPU, Y1 graphics group, Y2 arrow, AHA active display area.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling it to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Holding storage means for storing information on a variable display not yet started as holding storage;
Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored by the hold storage means;
A variation handling display means capable of performing a variation handling display corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display;
Re-variation display executing means for executing re-variation display after the specific identification information is stopped;
The pending display mode change that changes the display mode of the pending display before the change display of the target holding memory is performed, and the change corresponding display mode change that changes the display mode of the change handling display during the execution of the variable display A display mode changing unit capable of changing at least one of the display modes;
A first change suggests directing suggest the hold display mode change, the variation corresponding display mode at least one of changes suggested directing the second change suggested directing suggest change, hold display corresponding to pending memory of interest A change suggestion performing means capable of being executed at any one of a plurality of timings in the period and the period of the variable display period,
The changes suggested demonstration execution means, the display form change target by the display mode changing means, the normal display depending on whether it is a different first specific display and the second specific display, the change suggested effect select the percentage of timing to be executed by Ri is Do different,
For the second change suggestion effect, a success effect for changing the display mode of the variation-responsive display after executing the common suggestion effect, and a failure effect for not changing the display mode of the variation-responsive display after executing the common suggestion effect There is a
Among the plurality of timings during the variable display, the ratio at which the success effect is performed differs depending on at which timing the common suggestion effect is performed,
When the common suggestion effect is performed at the timing after the specific identification information stops, the ratio at which the success effect is performed is greater than when the common suggestion effect is performed at the timing before the specific identification information stops. High, gaming machines.